Product Information 2007
|
|
|
- Warren Reginald Walker
- 10 years ago
- Views:
Transcription
1 textile components Product Information 2007 accotex texparts 1
2 textile components textile components All Quality Determining Components from One Source Oerlikon Textile Components is a business unit of OC Oerlikon, a worldwide leading technology company in the areas of thin film, vacuum, precision and textile technology. Oerlikon Textile Components includes the well established brands of Accotex, Daytex, Enka Tecnica, Heberlein, Temco and Texparts. Oerlikon Textile Components is one of the worlds leading suppliers of quality determining components for all textile spinning applications and nonwoven products. Highest quality and reliability are the common characteristics for all products. By developing innovative products Oerlikon Textile Components will continue to strengthen its leading position in the sector of textile spinning applications and nonwoven products. Oerlikon Textile Components has 1,300 employees worldwide with factories and sales offices in the Americas, Europe and Asia. A worldwide network of experienced representatives ensures prompt service and close contact with our customers in spinning mills as well as with the leading machine manufacturers. Heberlein and Temco supply products for the filament market and Enka Tecnica serves spinning & nonwoven customers. The product lines of Accotex and Texparts ensure an effective and extensive customer service for products like Aprons, Bearings, Cots, Drafting Systems, Rings and Spindles. The 2007 edition of the Accotex Texparts Product Information introduces a broad range of new products as well as detailed data of the established product program. In addition we provide general information about textile technology and applications. September 2007, Oerlikon Textile Components
3 textile components Worldwide Business Contents Chapter 1 Page Spindle bearing units / spindle bottom parts 1 for spinning and twisting spindles Spindle lubricating apparatus with accessories Spindle units CS1 2 Spindle units CS Spindle bearing units HF Insert without bolster 6 Spindle bearing units HZ Insert with bolster 8 Spindle bearing units BIFLEX 10 Complete spindles 12 Spindle lubricating apparatus Lubrication adapters and Accessories for 15 spindle bearing units CS, HF, HZ and SF Manufacturing & sales facilities Chapter 2 Page Sales offices Contact rolls for tangential belt drives 1 Tension pulleys with shells, Bearing units, Cam followers Contact rolls AR Contact rolls AR Contact rolls AR Bearing units ZB, ZL 8 Tension pulley SR 10 Tension pulley SR Bearing unit CK 12 Bearing unit FR 14 Bearing units SR 16 Bearing units ZL and CR 18 Bearing units DR 20 Drawoff rollers with cots CK and ZL
4 Chapter 3 Page Chapter 5 Page Top rollers LP 1 Accotex Cots for short and long staple ring spinning Top roller lubricating equipment and accessories Top rollers series LP Top rollers series LP Top rollers series LP Top rollers series LP Top rollers series LP Top rollers series LP 1016, Top rollers series LP 302 with special shape of saddle 8 Accotex Cots for Short Staple Ring Spinning 10 Accotex Cots for Short Staple Ring Spinning, Carpet Spinning 11 Accotex Cots for Long Staple Ring Spinning 12 Lubricating equipment and accessories, Grease guns 14 Chapter 4 Page Bottom roller bearings 1 Bottom roller bearings UL locating cap with side lugs 2 Bottom roller bearings UL with locating cap with central nose 4 Bottom roller bearings UL with locating clip UCL with side lugs 6 Bottom roller bearings UL Special designs 8 Lubricating equipment and Accessories for bottom rollers, 10 Contact roll assemblies and Tension pulleys 10 Weighting arms with equipment and draft system data 1 Top apron cradles Accotex aprons for short and long staple ring spinning Condensers, Distance clips, Setting tools Pneumatic accessories Weighting arms PK 3025, PK 3035 Pneumatic load principle 2 Weighting arms PK 3000 Equipment and draft system data cotton ring frames 4 Weighting arms PK 2130, PK Weighting arms PK 2130, PK 2135 Equipment and draft system data cotton ring frames 8 Weighting arms PK 2155, PK Weighting arms PK 2155, PK 2165 Equipment and draft system data cotton ring frames 12 Weighting arms PK 2025, PK Weighting arms PK 2025, PK 2035 Equipment and draft system data cotton ring frames 16 Weighting arms PK 2055, PK Weighting arms PK 2055, PK 2065 Equipment and draft system data cotton ring frames 20 Weighting arms PK Weighting arms PK 5000 Equipment and draft system data cotton roving frames 26 Weighting arms PK Weighting arms PK 1550 Equipment and draft system data cotton roving frames 34 Weighting arms PK 1550 Equipment and draft system data cotton roving frames 36 Weighting arms PK Weighting arms PK 1500 Equipment and draft system data cotton roving frames 40 Weighting arms PK 1500 Equipment and draft system data cotton roving frames 42 Weighting arm PK Weighting arm PK 6000 Equipment and draft system data worsted ring spinning machines
5 Chapter 6 Page Weighting arms PK Weighting arms PK 1660 Equipment and draft system data worsted ring spinning machines 50 Weighting arms PK Weighting arms PK 1601 Equipment and draft system data worsted ring spinning machines 54 Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Top apron cradles OH Bottom apron nose bar 86 Accotex aprons for short staple ring spinning 88 Accotex aprons for long staple ring spinning 89 Roving guides, condensers 90 Distance clips OLC 96 Setting tools 98 Pneumatic accessories for PK Pneumatic accessories for PK 5000 and PK Rotor spindles, Beater spindles, Bearing units 1 Rotor spindles TL 2 Elastic bush EB 2 Rotor spindles TL 4 Beater spindle LE 6 Beater spindle LE 8 Bearing units IL 10 Bearing units ZB 12 Bearing units ZL 13 Chapter 7 Page Bearing units for texturizing aggregates, counter rolls, separator rolls, 1 Lubricating equipment and accessories for separator rolls, Daytex texturizing cots False twist assemblies FL 2 Counter rolls CK with bearing units FL 4 Counter rolls CK with bearing units FL 6 False twist assemblies FL 7 False twist assemblies FL 8 False twist assemblies FL Guidici 9 Separator rolls VR 10 Separator rolls VR 12 Lubricating equipment and accessories for separator rolls VR 14 Daytex texturizing cots
6 Chapter 8 Page Lubrication and servicing, testing and measuring 1 Bearing units for textile machines Lubrication of products for textile machines 2 Viscosity classes 9 Lubricating apparatus for lubrication of Texparts spindle bearing units 10 Lubrication of spindle bearing units SMM BIFLEX 12 Ordering top rollers with Accotex cots 13 Lubrication of bottom roller bearings 15 Tension pulleys 16 Bearing units for texturizing aggregates 17 Separator rolls VR 18 Chapter 9 Page Recommendations for optimized spinning with Texparts spindles 1 and Texparts draft equipment Texparts spindle bearing units for spinning and twisting spindles 2 Applications for Texparts spindle bearing units 5 Tubes and bobbins 6 The functions of ring and traveller 8 Spindle drive in ring frames 15 Series PK 3000 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines pneumatic load principle 18 Draft sizes 19 Draft field settings 20 Roller loading 22 Partial load 23 Top apron cradles and top aprons 24 Opening X at apron release point 26 Top roller cots 28 Bottom aprons 28 Series PK 2100 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines 29 Draft sizes 30 Draft fields 31 Roller loading 34 Top apron cradles and top aprons 36 Opening X at apron release point 38 Top roller cots 41 Bottom aprons 42 Series PK 2000 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines 43 Draft sizes 44 Draft fields 45 Roller loading 48 Top apron cradles and top aprons 50 Opening X at apron release point 52 Top roller cots 55 Bottom Aprons 56 Series PK 5000 weighting arms for cotton roving frames pneumatic load principle 57 Sliver 59 Draft sizes 59 Draft fields 60 Roller loading 62 Top apron cradle system 65 Opening X at apron release point 65 Top aprons for PK Top roller cots 67 Bottom apron nose bar 67 Condensers 67 Series PK 1550 weighting arms for cotton roving frames 70 Drawing frame sliver feed 72 Draft ratios 72 Draft fields 72 Roller loading 74 Top apron cradle system 75 Opening X at apron release point 76 Top aprons for PK Top roller cots 77 Bottom apron nose bar 78 Condensers
7 Series PK 1500 weighting arms for cotton roving frames 81 Drawing frame sliver feed 82 Draft ratios 83 Draft fields 83 Roller loading 85 Top apron cradle system 86 Opening X at apron release point 87 Top aprons for PK Top roller cots 88 Bottom apron nose bar 89 Condensers 89 Series PK 6000 weighting arms for worsted ring spinning machines pneumatic load principle 92 Draft ratios 93 Draft fields 93 Roller loading 95 Top apron cradle system 97 Opening X at apron release point 97 Top rollers and cots 98 Recessed rollers 100 Monoclearer roller system 100 Bottom apron nose bar 101 Condensers for PK Series PK 1660 weighting arms for worsted ring spinning machines 103 Draft ratios 103 Draft fields 105 Roller loading 107 Partial load 108 Top apron cradles 108 Opening X at apron release point 109 Top roller cots 110 Recessed rollers 110 Bottom apron nose bar 112 Condensers for PK Series PK 1601 weighting arms for worsted ring spinning machines 114 Draft ratios 114 Draft fields 116 Roller loading 118 Partial load 119 Top apron cradles 119 Opening X at apron release point 120 Top roller cots 121 Recessed rollers 121 Bottom apron nose bar 123 Condensers for PK For all Texparts draft systems Survey of top roller's outer ring and cot dimensions 125 Bottom roller bearings 128 CONVERSIONPlus 129 Modernization of ring spinning machines Chapter 10 Page Textile terms 1 General technical terms Fineness designation of fibres, yarns and strands 2 Finenessrelated maximum tensile strength 3 Fineness designation of fibres, slivers and yarns, formulae for calculations 4 Fineness designations of plyyarns 6 Formulae for mill machine calculations 8 Additions of regain for fibres and filaments 13 Further practical formulae 14 Yarn twist 15 Grades and staple length of cottons from various growths 16 Spinning limits for cotton and wool 19 Classification system for wool 20 Traveller speeds in m/s 22 Shapes and types of ring travellers
8 The most usual types of ring travellers for selflubricating HZ rings 26 The most usual types of ring travellers for selflubricating J rings 27 Traveller Numbers for cotton spinning 28 Humidity and temperature 29 The h,x diagram for determining air conditioning factors 30 Britishmetric units conversion table 32 Millimeter into inches and inches into millimetres conversion table 33 Inches into millimetres conversion table 35 Introduction of international SI units 37 Conversion of units no longer to be used 38 Chapter 11 Page Sales Companies and Representatives 1 Chapter 12 Page Complete List of Product Reference Numbers 1 Product numbers according to ascending reference numbers 2 Products in alphabetical order 18 14
9 Texparts Products for Spinning with Ring and Traveller for Cover Yarn Spinning 1 Spindle bearing units / spindle bottom parts for spinning and twisting spindles Spindle lubricating apparatus with accessories Chapter 11
10 Texparts Spindle units CS1 Application CSRG ring Examples for the possible design of CS1: Remarks Spindle unit CS1 compact spindle bearing unit for spinning spindles in cotton and worsted ring spinning machines with speeds up to rpm. See also chapter 9, page 2. The indicated types are examples for the possible design of CS1. The relevant flange dimensions are adjusted to the relations of dimensions of each specific ring spinning machine. Texparts supplies the CS1 with different flange versions, with and without hook and brake, ready to be installed, for all types of ring spinning machines. CS1 versions without flange are also available. CS1 Version with hook CS1 Version hookless CS1 Version with inner locking Ring spinning machines Cotton mills Worsted mills Cylindrical footstep shape with spherical tip The spare part Ref. no. of the locking ring for the spindle version with inner locking is (standard version: grey) and (Rieter version: white). An appropriate unlocking lever can be supplied upon request. Chapter 12 Chapter 13
11 Texparts Spindle units CS1 12 Application Spindle unit CS1 12 compact spindle bearing unit for spinning spindles in cotton and worsted ring frames for coarse yarns as well as for spinning with suppressed yarn ballon and for spinning with big tube sizes. CSRG ring See also chapter 9, page 2. Ring spinning machines Cotton mills Worsted mills CS1 12 Version with hook The CS1 12 differs from the standard spindle bearing unit of CS1 series by a bearing distance of 120 mm (dimension B). The indicated types are examples for the possible design of CS1 12. Texparts supplies the CS1 12 with different flange versions, with and without hook and brake, ready to be installed, for all types of ring spinning machines. The relevant flange dimensions are adjusted to the relations of dimensions of each specific ring spinning machine. CS1 12 Version hookless CS1 12 Version with inner locking Cylindrical footstep shape with spherical tip The spare part ref. no. of the locking ring for the spindle version with inner locking is An appropriate unlocking lever can be supplied upon request. Chapter 14 Chapter 15
12 Texparts Spindle bearing units HF Insert without bolster Application Spindle insert HF for spinning and twisting spindles operating with or without ring and traveller, with light to medium loads and high speeds. See also chapter 9, page 2. Types Dimensions in mm Ref. no. A R P HF ,0 21,7 8,8 HF ) 158,0 21,7 8,8 HF ) 158,0 21,7 8,8 HF ,5 23,8 10,0 HF ) 173,5 23,8 10,0 HF ) 173,5 23,8 10,0 Shape of Weight Q I max. footstep kg bearing 5,50 15,5 I ,50 15,5 I ,45 15,5 II 6,45 16,5 II ,45 16,5 II ,95 16,5 II Spindle Bearing Units for special applications upon request. Conical footstep shape with blade tip Cylindrical footstep shape with tapered blade Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Cotton mills Worsted mills Doubling mills 1) Version with special damping spring for spinning and twisting with suppressed yarn balloon. 2) Version for application in TwoforOne spindles. HF 3 HF 35 HF 44 HF 45 Chapter 16 Chapter 17
13 Texparts Spindle bearing units HZ Insert with bolster Application Types Dimensions in mm Ref.no A R P Q Weight H H 1 H 2 M kg Spindle bolster HZ for spinning and twisting spindles to operate with or without ring and traveller with high speeds and all kinds of load from light to very heavy. HZ ) 146,0 21,7 8,8 5,45 HZ ) 163,5 21,7 8,8 8,45 HZ ,5 23,7 10,0 6,45 HZ ,0 28,2 12,0 7,95 HZ ,0 32,5 14,0 8,95 HZ ,0 32,5 14,0 10,95 HZ ,0 37,8 16,0 10,95 55,0 37,0 54,0 M 25 x 1,5 0,313 55,0 54,5 54,0 M 25 x 1,5 0, ,0 47,5 31,0 M 27 x 1,5 0, ,0 37,0 36,0 M 32 x 1,5 0, ,5 56,0 28,5 M 35 x 1,5 0, ,5 56,0 28,5 M 35 x 1,5 0, ,0 100,5 40,5 M 40 x 1,5 1,750 Spindle Bearing Units for special applications upon request. Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Cotton mills Worsted mills Twisting mills Cylindrical footstep shape with tapered blade 1) Version for application in TwoforOne spindles. HZ 33 HZ 35 HZ 440 HZ 55 HZ 66 HZ 68 HZ 77 Chapter 18 Chapter 19
14 Texparts Spindle bearing units BIFLEX Application Types Ref. No Weight kg Heavy spindle bearing unit in BIFLEX design for high speed applications in draw twisting machines. SMM ,664 SMM ,041 Twisting machines Twisting mills SMM SMM Chapter 110 Chapter 111
15 Texparts Complete spindles Application For spinning and twisting processes. Cotton mills Worsted mills Twisting mills Texparts offers a comprehensive range of complete spindles for various kinds of spinning and twisting processes: Cotton spindles with bare blades or with aluminium plugs Worsted or semiworsted spindles with or without spinning crowns resp. spinning fingers Spindles for draw twisters, for small cop sizes Spindles for twisting frames All spindles are being optimized considering the tubes to be used, the type of spindle drive, the minimum and maximum speed required and other customers demands. The spindles will be equipped with the most suitable spindle bearing unit. Furthermore, a wideranged variety of different flange, brake and locking types as well as other spindle accessories are available. Highest precision in manufacture as precondition for a steady and vibrationreduced operation as well as a longlasting service life of the spindle are guaranteed. Complete spindles supplied by Texparts are hightech products. The efficiency of each spindle speaks for itself: reduction in energy requirements and running noise. high spindle speeds up to rpm lowvibration running minimization of spindle oscillations Please ask for Texparts questionnaire for complete spindle inquiries. Some examples of light spinning and twisting spindles: Chapter 112 Chapter 113
16 Texparts Spindle lubricating apparatus Texparts Lubrication adapters and Accessories for spindle bearing units CS, HF, HZ and SF Application Type Ref.no. Product Adapter Ref.no. Suitable for spindle types Application Lubricating apparatus for servicing Texparts and SKF spindle bearing units CS, HF, HZ and SF Lubricating apparatus with an electrically driven pump CS1 1) 4) 1) 4) CS1 S CS1 1) 5) 1) 5) CS1 S CS1 2) CS1 S 2) CS1 2) 5) 2) 5) CS1 S Lubrication adapters for lubricating apparatus for servicing Texparts and SKF spindle bearing units CS, HF, HZ and SF CS1 12 1) CS1 S 12 1) CS1 12 2) CS1 S 12 2) HF ) HZ ) SF )4) HF ) HF ) )5) HF ) SF 210 1) Standard version 2) Version with inner locking Dimensions in mm: Length: 450; Width: 380; Height: 720 Weight: 29 kg net HF HF HZ HZ ) Replacement for adapters , and ) Long version 5) Short version Electric drive: The Texparts spindle lubrication apparatus is available with electric drive 1x220 V and 1x110 V. Please specify HF HF HF HF HZ Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Cotton mills Worsted mills Twisting mills Note: The standard supply of the spindle lubricating apparatus does not include any adapter. These have to be ordered as separate item. For Ref. No. of adapters see next page HZ HZ HZ HZ Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Cotton mills Worsted mills Twisting mills Chapter 114 Chapter 115
17
18 Texparts Products for Spinning with Ring and Traveller for Rotor Spinning 2 Contact rolls for tangential belt drives Tension pulleys with shells Bearing units Cam followers Chapter 2 1
19 Texparts Contact rolls AR 5047 Application Types Spindle Dimensions Ref.no. gauge in mm mm A B C Weight kg Remarks For Ring spinning machines and twisting machines with tangential belt drives. Belt width up to approx. 40mm max. AR AR AR , AR AR 5047 can be used as replacement for former types AR 28, AR 45, AR 15, AR 13 and AR If AR 5047 is mounted to replace AR 13 distance piece ADZ will be needed. For lubrication see chapter 8 page 2. Ring spinning machines AR Cotton mills Worsted mills Chapter 2 2 Chapter 2 3
20 Texparts Contact rolls AR 3528 Application For Ring spinning machines with multimotor single tangential belt drives. Belt width up to approx. 20mm max. For lubrication see chapter 8 page 2. Types Spindle Dimensions Ref.no. gauge in mm mm A B C AR AR AR , AR ) 82, AR AR , Weight kg AR Ring spinning machines AR ) point of view for right or left hand Cotton mills 1) righthand half contact roll AR Chapter 2 4 Chapter 2 5
21 Texparts Contact rolls AR 5024 Application Types Spindle Dimensions Ref.no. gauge in mm mm A B C Weight kg Remarks For Ring spinning machines with sectional drive. Belt width up to approx. 16mm max. For lubrication see chapter 8 page 2. AR AR ) AR ) AR AR ) AR ) half right hand half left hand half right hand half left hand point of view for right of left hand point of view for right of left hand Ring spinning machines AR LI 2) AR Cotton mills Worsted mills 1) righthand half contact roll 2) lefthand half contact roll Chapter 2 6 Chapter 2 7
22 Texparts Bearing units ZB, ZL Application Tension pulleys for guiding and tensioning the tape or the belt in belt drives. Types Max. Load fig.in N Ref.no. speed n C C 0 min 1 ZB ZL ) Weight kg As guide or tension pulley in general engineering applications. ZB ZL ) Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Textile machinery General engineering applications 1) Delivery ex works ungreased and without cap. Chapter 2 8 Chapter 2 9
23 Texparts Tension pulley SR Application Tension pulley SR 5047 for guiding and tensioning the tape or the belt in belt drives. As guide or tension pulley in general engineering applications. Types Max. Load fig.in N Ref.no. speed n C C 0 min 1 SR SR Weight Max. belt Remarks kg width mm Tension pulley with angle (lefthand) Tension pulley with angle (righthand) Top view of angle see drawing of AR 5047 on chapter 2 page 2. Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Textile machinery General engineering applications SR SR Chapter 2 10 Chapter 2 11
24 Texparts Tension pulley SR Bearing unit CK Application Types Max. Load fig.in N Ref.no. speed n C C 0 min 1 Weight Max. belt Nut SMT Remarks kg width Ref. no. mm Tension pulley SR 28 for guiding the tangential belt return in twobelt arrangements. SR SR SMT SMT Nut SMT for tension pulleys SR 28 is not included in standard supply and has to be ordered as separate item. Tension pulley SR 45 for guiding and tensioning the tape or the belt in belt drives. As guide or tension pulley in general engineering applications. SR CK Tension pulley is balanced SR Ring spinning machines Twisting machines Textile machinery General engineering applications CK SR SMT SR SMT Chapter 2 12 Chapter 2 13
25 Texparts Bearing unit FR Application Types Max. Load fig. in N Ref.no. speed n C C 0 min 1 dyn. stat. Weight kg Guide roller FR as bearing unit for gear mechanisms and pulleys, as guide roller for the belts in cone drives. FR I 2900 I 1780 II 630 II Limits for stud diameter d: 0/0,01 mm FR Textile machinery General engineering applications 1) with antitorque protection. 2) black finished version. I = roller bearing; II = ball bearing Chapter 2 14 Chapter 2 15
26 Texparts Bearing units SR Application Bearing units SR for tension pulleys, gear mechanisms and other pulleys. Types Dimensions in mm Ref.no. d D 1 D 2 G N SW1 SW2 SR M21x SR M21x SR ) M21x SR M21x SR M25x Load rating in N Weight A 3) A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 S S 1 C C 0 kg dyn. stat I 2900 I II 630 II I 2900 I II 630 II I 2900 I II 630 II I 2900 I II 630 II I 3400 I II 1000 II Max. speed of all types: rpm ball bearing roller bearing Textile machinery General engineering applications 1) blackfinished version I = roller bearing; II = ball bearing screw on length SR 23 SR 24 SR 35 Chapter 2 16 Chapter 2 17
27 Texparts Bearing units ZL and CR Application Bearing unit ZL for toothed wheels and other pulleys. Bearing Unit CR 2 for textile machines and general engineering applications. Types Max. Load rating in N Ref.no. speed C C 0 min 1 ZL ) ZL ) I 0540 I 2160 II 0710 II CR )2) I 2900 I 1780 II 0630 II ZL ) ZL ) CR )2) Textile machinery General engineering applications 1) Delivery ex works ungreased. 2) Delivery ex works without cap. 3) Counter bearing for CR Chapter 2 18 Chapter 2 19
28 Texparts Bearing units DR Application For winders and for general engineering applications. Types Dimensions in mm Ref.no. d D D 1 D 2 DR DR DR DR DR All types greased ex works, without end cover. Max. Load rating in N Weight A A 1 A 2 S S 1 speed n C C 0 kg min I 0630 I 1060 II 0140 II 0, I 0630 I 1060 II 0140 II 0, I 0630 I 1060 II 0140 II 0, I 1000 I 1630 II 232 II 0, I 1000 I 1630 II 232 II 0,041 DR DR DR DR Textile machinery General engineering applications DR Chapter 2 20 Chapter 2 21
29 Texparts Drawoff rollers with cots CK and ZL Application Types Cot 1) Load rating in N Weight Remarks Ref.no. C C 0 kg Drawoff roller with cot for rotor spinning frames, winders and for general engineering application in textile machines. CK basic bearing unit for CK CK J490 A CK HA ZL AL rubber seal running in contact with inner ring ZL AL metal seal ZL AL Textile machinery General engineering applications ZL ZL ZL ) Other cots available on request. CK CK CK Chapter 2 22 Chapter 2 23
30
31 Texparts Products for Spinning with Ring and Traveller 3 Top rollers LP Accotex Cots for short and long staple ring spinning Top roller lubricating equipment and accessories Chapter 31
32 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1002 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1002 Application Top roller for use as front and rear top roller. If requested top rollers can also be supplied as apron top roller with cot depending on gauge and top apron cradle OH. Cotton ring spinning machines with weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000, Series PK All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. For cot dimensions see chapter 9 page 125. If desired Texparts will supply top rollers with ready ground cots. Cot quality can be determined by the customer himself. Top roller load: 25 dan Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y LP LP LP LP LP All types: Saddle diameter 9.5 ground Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y LP LP LP Application Top roller for use as apron top roller with cot for apron width 32 mm preferably. Cotton ring spinning machines with weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000, Series PK All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. For cot dimensions see chapter 9 page 126. If desired Texparts will supply top rollers with ready ground cots. Cot quality can be determined by the customer himself. Top roller load: 25 dan Ring spinning machines Ring spinning machines Cotton mills Cotton mills Chapter 32 Chapter 33
33 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1003 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1014 Application Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y Application LP 1003: Top roller with special sleeves for use as apron top roller. Cotton ring spinning machines with weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000, Series PK To be used without cots. LP LP LP LP All types: Saddle diameter 9.5 ground Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) LP LP LP LP ) All types: Saddle diameter 11 ground Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) Top roller for use as front and rear top roller. Worsted ring spinning machines with weighting arms of series PK 6000 and PK 1601 All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. For cot dimensions see chapter 9 page 127. Top roller load: 25 dan Top roller load: 35 dan Ring spinning machines Ring spinning machines Cotton mills 1) Delivery until usingup of stock. Worsted mills Cotton mills Chapter 34 Chapter 35
34 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1015 Texparts Top rollers series LP 1016, 1017 Application Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y E Application Top roller for use as front and rear top roller. Cotton roving frames with PK 5000, PK 1500, PK 1600 weighting arms. All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. For cot dimensions see chapter 9 page 126. LP ) LP ) LP LP LP All types: Saddle diameter 11 ground Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) LP LP LP LP LP LP All types: Saddle diameter 11 ground Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) Top roller for use as apron top roller. Cotton roving frames and worsted ring frames with weighting arms series PK 1500, PK All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. For cot dimensions see chapter 9 pages 126 and 127. Top roller load: 35 dan Top roller load: 35 dan. Ring spinning machines Cotton roving frames Ring spinning machines Cotton roving frames Cotton mills Worsted mills 1) In worsted ring spinnning machines with PK 6000 weighting arm: For use as apron top roller Worsted mills Cotton mills Chapter 36 Chapter 37
35 Texparts Top rollers series LP 302 with special shape of saddle Texparts Top rollers series LP 302 with special shape of saddle Application Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y Types Gauge Dimension Ref.no. Tw in mm in mm Y Application Top roller for use as front and rear top roller for Rieter draft systems in cotton ring spinning machines. LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP Top roller for use as front and rear top roller as well as apron top roller with cot for Rieter draft systems in cotton ring spinning machines. All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. All top rollers in this chapter are without cot. All types: Colour of end cover: blue End cover: LPDE (blue) Top roller load: 25 dan. Top roller load: 25 dan. Ring spinning machines Ring spinning machines Cotton mills Cotton mills Chapter 38 Chapter 39
36 Accotex Cots for Short Staple Ring Spinning Accotex Cots for Short Staple Ring Spinning Carpet Spinning Roving Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness 100% Cotton, Apron roller Blends, ME480 black 80 Synthetics General purpose front and rear roller cot 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics J490 grey 83 Spinning Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Front roller cot for wet Synthetics ME560 brown 60 spinning Front roller cot for fine counts Ne 30 and above Front roller cot for high quality in medium and fine counts Front roller cot for high quality in medium and fine counts 100% Cotton J463 lavender % Cotton, Blends, PES 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics J466 yellow 66 J470 green 70 Example Example Spinning Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Front and rear top roller cot for high yarn quality. Coarse to medium counts Apron roller General purpose front and rear roller cot 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics J476 blue 73 ME.480 black 80 J490 grey 83 Carpet Spinning Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Improved resistance to wear General purpose front and rear roller cot Nylon, Polyester Chapter 310 Chapter 311 J490S reddish brown 72 All fibres J490 grey 83 Example Example
37 Accotex Cots for Long Staple Ring Spinning Accotex Cots for Long Staple Ring Spinning Preparation and Roving Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Apron roller Wool, Synthetics, ME480 black 80 Blends General purpose front and rear roller cot Wool, Synthetics, Blends J490 grey 83 Finisseur Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness General purpose front and rear roller cot Wool J470 green 70 for superior quality General purpose front and rear roller cot Wool, Synthetics, Blends J490 grey 83 Spinning Balloon Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Wall Thickness Thickness according to fibre and yarn count Wool, Synthetics, Blends NO780B grey 1.7, 2.0, 2.2, 2.5 Example Example Example Spinning Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness General purpose front roller cot for highest quality 100% Wool J463 lavender 63 for counts Ne 40 and above General purpose front roller cot for fine to medium counts General purpose front and rear roller cot 100% Wool J470 green 70 Wool, Synthetics, Blends J490 grey 83 Example Clearer Covers Applications Fibre Product Colour Example Drawing and roving Spinning and roving 100% Cotton, Synthetics, Blends, Wool 100% Cotton, Synthetics, Blends, Wool NO780P NK770 grey green Chapter 312 Chapter 313
38 Texparts Lubricating equipment and accessories Grease guns Application For lubricating small numbers of top rollers. For top roller types LP 1002 LP 1014, LP 1015 LP 1016, LP 1017 Item Types Ref.no. As regards lubrication of bottom roller bearings see chapter 4 page 10. Grease guns (without nozzle) Size 2 Contents 120 cm Size 3 Contents 340 cm Nozzle (to be screwed on grease gun) Ref.no. : For lubrication of top rollers from Texparts, the nozzle , which must be ordered separately, has to be screwed on the grease gun Cotton mills Worsted mills Chapter 314
39 Texparts Products for Spinning with Ring and Traveller 4 Bottom roller bearings Chapter 41
40 Texparts Bottom roller bearings UL locating cap with side lugs Application For bottom rollers of draft systems of Ring spinning machines and Roving frames. Types for roller Dimensions Ref.no. stand in mm width in mm d D 1) D 1 UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL ) L L 1 L 3 Load rating Weight dan kg dyn. C Standard lubricating nipple Standard lubricating nipple UL UL Locating cap Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Worsted mills 1) D 1 = Flange diameter of inner ring. 2) Delivery until usingup of stock. Chapter 42 Chapter 43
41 Texparts Bottom roller bearings UL with locating cap with central nose Application Types Dimensions Ref.no. in mm d D K Load rating Weight dan kg 5) D 1 L L 1 N dyn.c Remarks For bottom rollers of draft systems of Ring spinning machines and roving frames. UL UL ) UL ) UL ) UL UL ) UL UL UL ) UL UL UL ) ) Different tolerances of bore diameter. 2) Funnel lubricating nipple. 3) Ex works without lubricant. With safety bow. 4) Special locating cap. 5) D 1 = flange diameter of inner ring. Safety bow 3) Funnel lubricating nipple 0 Bore tolerance for pressfit d 0.01 Bore tolerance for slide fit d Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Worsted mills Locating cap UL ) UL ) UL ) Chapter 44 Chapter 45
42 Texparts Bottom roller bearings UL with locating clip UCL with side lugs Application Types Dimensions Ref.no. in mm d D 1) D 1 Load rating Weight Remarks dan kg L L 1 K dyn. C For bottom rollers of draft systems of Ring spinning machines and Roving frames. For the application of bottom roller bearings with side lugs, the standard types with locating cap (see chapter 4 page 2) should be used if bearing dimensions are identical. UL UL UL UL UL UL Locating clip Ref.no. for roller stand width mm L 3 UCL UCL UCL UCL UCL Standard lubricating nipple Diecasting cap One locating clip to be used with each bottom roller bearing. Size L 3 of clip depends on width of roller stand. If bottom rollers are ordered, the locating clip according to the required stand width must be ordered separately. UCL Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Worsted mills 1) D 1 = flange diameter of inner ring. Locating clip UCL Chapter 46 Chapter 47
43 Texparts Bottom roller bearings UL Special designs Application Types Ref.no. Dimensions in mm 1) 2) d D D 1 d 1 Load rating Weight Remarks dan kg L L 1 N dyn. C For bottom rollers of Ring spinning machines and draw frames. UL UL UL Delivery until using up of stock Washer Funnel lubricating nipple Locating cap Standard lubricating nipple UL UL Ring spinning machines Draw frames Cotton mills 1) D 1 = collar diameter of inner ring. 2) d 1 = Inside diameter of the needle complement. UL Chapter 48 Chapter 49
44 Texparts Lubricating equipment and Accessories for bottom rollers, Contact roll assemblies and Tension pulleys Application For lubricating all types of Texparts bottom roller bearings, for lubricating contact roll assemblies and tension pulleys. As regards lubrication of top rollers see chapter 9 page 15. All nozzles mentioned are not included in the standard supply of the grease guns and have to be ordered as separate item. Item Types Nozzle Ref.no. Ref.no. Grease guns Size 2 Contents 120 cm Size 3 Contents 340 cm For bottom roller bearings UL with Texparts standard lubricating nozzle UL with funnel lubricating nozzle For contact roll assemblies AR ) AR ) AR ) AR ) AR ) AR ) AR ) For tension pulleys SR SR SR SR SR ) Cotton mills Worsted mills 1) Lubrication from top 2) Lubrication from front Chapter 410
45 Texparts Products for Spinning with Ring and Traveller 5 Weighting arms with equipment and draft system data Top apron cradles Accotex aprons for short and long staple ring spinning Condensers Distance clips Setting tools Pneumatic accessories Chapter 51
46 Texparts Weighting arms PK 3025, PK 3035 Pneumatic load principle Application Ring frame 3rollerdouble apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 2022 for cotton fibres, synthetics up to 45 mm, and corresponding blends. With cradle OH 2042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. With the cradle OH 1225 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm. PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibre ranges. See as well chapter 9, page 18. Types PK ) Ref.no. PK )3) Load on top roller [dan] Operating Front 1 Middle 2 Rear 3 pressure [bar] bar standard application range bar extended applica bar tion range* *) The possibility to utilize the "extended application range" has to be discussed with OEM. Top roller for PK 3025 Ø mm 2) : Front 1 Middle 2 Rear Top roller for PK 3035 Ø mm 2) : Front 1 Middle 2 Rear Front clearer roller Front clearer roller Gauge TW holder Ref.No. in mm Ref.No for Tw = 68.4 and for Tw = 82.5 Ring frames 1) Pneumatic loading; air pressure required. 2) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 3) In the case of PK 3035 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than on the PK 3025 (middle guide element Ref.No ) 4) Air pressure is limited to a maximum of 3 bar. Cotton mills PK Dimensions are shown in mm PK Chapter 52 Chapter 53
47 Texparts Weighting arms PK 3000 Equipment and draft system data Cotton ring frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 68.4 LP /3 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; (LP 1003 with special sleeve as standard): 68.4 OH (OH short) PR LP LP OH (OH medium) PR OH ) (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR LP LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR LP LP Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; apron top roller LP 1002 with cot or LP 1003 with special sleeve: 75 OH ) (OH long) PR LP LP OH ) (OH long) PR LP LP ) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Available on request. 3) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 2 = Middle 3 = Rear (see fig. on next page) Position in weighting arm 3) PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length PK Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 4) max. mm PK 3025 OH ) OH ) OH ) PK 3035 OH ) OH ) OH ) Clips For OH 2022 OLC yellow OLC lilac OLC white For OH 2042 OLC red OLC yellow OLC white For OH 1225 OLC yellow OLC white OLC grey Bottom roller PK 3025 Front I PK 3035 Front I diameter Middle II Middle II in mm: 5) Rear III Rear III Remarks 4) The distance VF depends on the fibre to be spun, length of fibre and roving twist. 5) Diameters shown for bottom rollers are mere reference values. Chapter 54 Chapter 55
48 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2130, PK 2135 Application Ring frame 3rollerdouble apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 2022 for cotton fibres, synthetics up to 45 mm, and corresponding blends. With cradle OH 2042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. Blends of those fibres. With the cradle OH 122 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm. PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibre ranges. See as well chapter 9, page 29. Position weighting elements Front Clearer Roller 3) Ref. no Loads in dan Gauge Tw in mm Top roller Ø mm 1) Clearer roller holders face of arm Ref. No. PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear Ring frames Cotton mills 1) Diameter values refer to newly covered top rollers. 2) Partial load 3) Colour of clearer roller: blue with grey flocking PK PK Dimensions are shown in mm. Chapter 56 Chapter 57
49 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2130, PK 2135 Equipment and draft system data Cotton ring frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 68.4 LP /3 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; (LP 1003 with special sleeve as standard): 68.4 OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP LP OH (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP LP Position in weighting arm 2) 2 PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length PK Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 3) max. mm PK OH ) OH ) OH ) PK OH ) OH ) OH ) Clips For OH 2022 OLC yellow OLC lilac OLC white For OH 2042 OLC red OLC yellow OLC white For OH 122 OLC yellow OLC white OLC grey 1) Ref. Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Bottom roller PK 2130 Front I PK 2135 Front I Cot quality according to customers' request. diameter Middle II Middle II ) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front in mm: 4) Rear III Rear III (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle Remarks 3 = Rear 3) The distance VF depends on the fibre to be spun, length of fibre and roving twist. 4) Diameters shown for bottom rollers are mere reference values Chapter 58 Chapter 59
50 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2155, PK 2165 Application Ring frame 3roller double apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 2022 for cottons, synthetics up to approx. 45 mm. Blends of both types. With cradle OH 2042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of about 54 mm of poor draft properties. Blends of both types. With cradle OH 122 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm. PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibre range. See as well chapter 9, page 29. Position weighting elements Loads in dan Top roller Ø mm 1) Clearer roller holders face of arm Ref. No. PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle , Rear PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle , Rear Front Clearer Roller 3) Ref. no Gauge Tw in mm Ring frames Cotton mills 1) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 2) Partial load 3) Colour of clearer roller: blue with grey flocking PK Dimensions are shown in mm. PK Chapter 510 Chapter 511
51 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2155, PK 2165 Equipment and draft system data Cotton ring frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 68.4 LP /3 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; (LP 1003 with special sleeve as standard): 68.4 OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP LP OH (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP LP Position in weighting arm 2) 2 Draft system setting PK PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 3) max. mm PK OH ) OH ) OH ) PK OH ) OH ) OH ) Clips For OH 2022 OLC yellow OLC lilac OLC white For OH 2042 OLC red OLC yellow OLC white For OH 122 OLC yellow OLC white OLC grey 1) Bottom roller PK 2155 Front I PK 2165 Front I Ref. Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. diameter Middle II Middle II Cot quality according to customers' request. in mm: 4) Rear III Rear III ) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle Remarks 3 = Rear 3) The distance VF depends on the fibre to be spun, length of fibre and roving twist. 4) Diameters shown for bottom rollers are mere reference values Chapter 512 Chapter 513
52 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2025, PK 2035 Application Ring frame 3rollerdouble apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 2022/OH 62 for cotton fibres, synthetics up to 45 mm, and corresponding blends. With cradle OH 2042/ OH 132 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. Blends of those fibres. With the cradle OH 122 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm. PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibre ranges. See as well Chapter 9, page 43. Position weighting elements Front Clearer Roller 3) Ref. no. Loads in dan Gauge Tw in mm Top roller Ø mm 1) Clearer roller holders face of arm Ref. No. PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear Ring frames PK PK Cotton mills 1) Diameter values refer to newly covered top rollers. 2) Partial load 3) Colour of roller: blue with grey flocking Dimensions are shown in mm. Chapter 514 Chapter 515
53 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2025, PK 2035 Equipment and draft system data Cotton ring frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 68,4 LP /3 75 LP /3 82,5 LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; (LP 1003 with special sleeve as standard): 68,4 OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH medium) OH (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP LP LP LP ,5 OH (OH short) PR LP LP Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; apron top roller LP 1002 with cot or LP 1003 with special sleeve: Position in weighting arm 2) PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length PK Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 3) max. mm PK OH 2022/OH ) OH 2042/OH ) OH ) PK OH 2022/OH ) OH 2042/OH ) OH ) OH (OH medium) PR LP Clips LP For OH 2022/OH 62 OLC yellow OLC lilac OLC white OH (OH long) PR For OH 2042/OH132 OLC red OLC yellow OLC white 82,5 OH (OH medium) PR LP For OH 122 OLC yellow OLC white OLC grey OH (OH long) PR LP Bottom roller PK 2025 Front I PK 2035 Front I diameter Middle II Middle II OH (OH short) PR LP in mm: 4) Rear III Rear III Ref. Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' Remarks 1) request. 3) The distance VF depends on the fibre to be spun, length of fibre and roving twist. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 2 = Middle 3 = Rear (see fig. on next page) 4) Diameters shown for bottom rollers are mere reference values Chapter 516 Chapter 517
54 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2055, PK 2065 Application Ring frame 3roller double apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 2022/OH 62 for cottons,synthetics up to approx. 45 mm. Blends of both types. With cradle OH 2042/ OH 132 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of about 54 mm of poor draft properties. Blends of both types. With cradle OH 122 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm. PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibre range See as well chapter 9, page 43. Position weighting elements Front Clearer Roller 3) Ref. no. Loads in dan Gauge Tw in mm Top roller Ø mm 1) Clearer roller holders face of arm Ref. No. PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear PK Front 1 6 2) PFE Middle Rear Ring frames Cotton mills 1) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 2) Partial load relieve 3) Colour of roller: blue with grey flocking PK Dimensions are shown in mm. PK Chapter 518 Chapter 519
55 Texparts Weighting arms PK 2055, PK 2065 Equipment and draft system data Cotton ring frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 68.4 LP /3 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; (LP 1003 with special sleeve as standard): 68.4 OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH medium) OH (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP LP LP LP OH (OH short) PR LP LP Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller; apron top roller LP 1002 with cot or LP 1003 with special sleeve: 75 OH (OH medium) PR LP LP OH (OH long) PR Position in weighting arm 2) PK PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 3) max. mm PK OH 2022/OH ) OH 2042/OH ) OH ) PK OH 2022/OH ) OH 2042/OH ) OH ) Clips For OH 2022/OH 62 OLC yellow OLC lilac OLC white For OH 2042/OH132 OLC red OLC yellow OLC white For OH 122 OLC yellow OLC white OLC grey 82.5 OH (OH medium) PR LP Bottom roller PK 2055 Front I PK 2065 Front I LP OH (OH long) PR diameter Middle II Middle II OH (OH short) PR LP in mm: 4) Rear III Rear III Remarks 1) Ref. Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 3) The distances VF depends on the fibre to be spun, length of fibre and roving twist. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 2 = Middle 3 = Rear (see fig. on next page) 4) Diameters shown for bottom rollers are mere reference values Chapter 520 Chapter 521
56 Texparts Weighting arms PK 5000 Application 3roller and 4roller double apron draft system for roving frames. With top apron cradle OH 5022 for cotton and synthetic fibres up to approx. 45 mm length. With cradle OH 5042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. With cradle OH 5245 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm fibre length. Application: PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibres. See as well chapter 9, page 57. Types PK ) Ref.no. PK ) Operating Load on top roller (dan) pressure Front 1 Middle 2 Rear 3 from 1,5 bar up to 4,0 bar Top roller for PK 5025 Ø mm 2) : Ø A=28 Ø A=25 Ø A=28 Top roller for PK 5035 Ø mm 2) : Ø A=35 Ø A=25 Ø A=35 PK ) PK Roving frames Cotton mills Dimensions are shown in mm. 1) Pneumatic loading; air pressure required. 2) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. Chapter 522 Chapter 523
57 Texparts Weighting arms PK 5000 Application 3roller and 4roller double apron draft system for roving frames. With top apron cradle OH 5022 for cotton and synthetic fibres up to approx. 45 mm length. With cradle OH 5042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. With cradle OH 5245 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm fibre length. Application: PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibres. See as well chapter 9, page 57. Types PK )3) Ref.no. PK )3) Operating Load on top roller (dan) pressure Front 1 Middle 2 Middle 3 Rear 4 from 1,5 bar up to 4,0 bar Top roller for PK 5025 Ø A=28 Ø A=28 Ø A=25 Ø A=28 Ø mm 2) Top roller for PK 5035 Ø A=35 Ø A=35 Ø A=25 Ø A=35 Ø mm 2)3) Types PK )3) Ref.no. PK )3) Operating Load on top roller (dan) pressure Front 1 Middle 2 Middle 3 Rear 4 from 1,5 bar up to 4,0 bar Top roller for PK 5025 Ø mm 2) : Ø A=28 Ø A=25 Ø A=28 Ø A=28 Top roller for PK 5035 Ø mm 2)3) : Ø A=35 Ø A=25 Ø A=35 Ø A=35 Roving frames Cotton mills Dimensions are shown in mm. 1) Pneumatic loading; air pressure required. 2) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 3) Available on request. Dimensions are shown in mm. 1) Pneumatic loading; air pressure required. 2) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 3) Available on request. Chapter 524 Chapter 525
58 Texparts Weighting arms PK 5000 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref. No. Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /3 110 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø 25 mm): 100 OH PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR LP OH (OH long) PR LP Position in weighting arm 2) Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max.fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GF mm length OH min. usual 3) max. mm PK OH ,5 3) OH ,5 3) OH ,5 3) PK OH ,5 3) OH ,5 3) OH ,5 3) Draft system setting OH 5022 OH 5042 OH ) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 (see fig. above) 2 = Middle 2 Top roller Ø in mm Ø A Ø B PK PK Clips for OH 5022 for OH 5042 for OH 5245 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green Bottom roller Front I 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 25/27 (mere reference values) Rear III 30/32 3) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. The values are gathered in practical use. 3 = Rear 3 Dimensions are shown in mm. Chapter 526 Chapter 527
59 Texparts Weighting arms PK 5000 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref. No. Position in weighting arm Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /2/4 110 LP /2/4 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR LP Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Fibre PK cradle HF Con VF VF GFmm length OH stant 3) min. usual 4) max. mm PK OH ,5 40,5 4) PK OH ,5 40,5 4) PK OH ,5 40,5 4) PK OH ,5 40,5 4) Draft system setting Top roller Ø in mm Ø A Ø B Clips for OH 5022 for OH 5042 OH 5022 OH 5042 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green PK Bottom roller Front I 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 30/32 PK (mere reference values) Middle III 25/27 Rear IV 30/32 Dimensions are shown in mm. 1) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. 2) 3) The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers Cot quality according to customers' request. depending on the PKconstruction. Enlarged distances depend on the Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 condensers and the field distance setting. (see fig. above) 2 = Middle 2 3 = Middle 3 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. 4 = Rear 4 The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 528 Chapter 529
60 Texparts Weighting arms PK 5000 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref. No. Position in weighting arm 2) Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /3/4 110 LP /3/4 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR LP Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Fibre PK cradle HF Con VF VF GFmm length OH stant 3) min. usual 4) max. mm PK OH ) PK OH ) PK OH ) PK OH ) Draft system setting Dimensions are shown in mm. Top roller Ø in mm Ø A Ø B PK PK Clips for OH 5022 for OH 5042 OH 5022 OH 5042 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green Bottom roller Front I 30 dia. in mm Middle II 30 (mere reference values) Middle III 30 Rear IV 30 1) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. 3) Cot quality according to customers' request. The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 depending on the PKconstruction. Enlarged distances depend on the (see fig. above) 2 = Middle 2 condensers and the field distance setting. 3 = Middle 3 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. 4 = Rear 4 The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 530 Chapter 531
61 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1550 Application Types Ref.No. Loads in dan For top roller Ø mm Clearer roller holder 1) for front of arm Ref. No. Application 3roller and 4roller double apron draft system for roving frames. With top apron cradle OH 5022 for cotton and synthetic fibres up to approx. 45 mm length. With cradle OH 5042 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. With cradle OH 5245 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm fibre length. PK Front Middle Rear PK Front Middle Rear PK Front Middle Middle Rear PFE PFE PFE PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibres. PK with top apron cradles OH 5022 for fibres up to approx. 45 mm See as well chapter 9, page 70. Roving frames PK PK PK Cotton mills Dimensions are shown in mm. Dimensions are shown in mm. Distances for top roller holders are shown in mm. 1) Front clearer roller holders are delivered separately on special order. Chapter 532 Chapter 533
62 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1550 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /3 110 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP OH (OH long) PR Position in weighting arm 2) Draft field setting 3) PK PK Draft field settings and max.fibre length Weighting Top apron Field distances in mm Max.fibre arm PK cradle OH HF VF VF GF mm length min usual 4) max. mm PK OH ) OH ) OH ) ) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 2 PK OH ) OH ) OH ) Clips for OH 5022 for OH 5042 for OH 5245 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green Bottom roller Front I 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 25/27 (mere reference values) Rear III 30/32 3) The mentioned draft field distances take a front zone condenser into account. Without front zone condenser the front zone (HF) can be shortened. 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. 3 = Rear 3 The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 534 Chapter 535
63 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1550 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arm PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Position in weighting arm 2) Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /2/4 110 LP /2/4 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Fibre PK cradle OH HF Con VF VF GF mm length stant 3) min usual 4) max. mm PK OH ) Clips for OH 5022 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green 1) Ref. Nos.mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. In case of 4rollertype PK top roller combination is mm and top roller types LP1015 LP1015 LP 1017 LP Normally the OH 514 is used. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 2 3 = Middle 3 4 = Rear 4 Bottom roller Front l 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 30/32 (mere refe Middle III 30/32 rence values) Rear IV 30/32 3) The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers depending on the PKconstruction. Enlarged distances depend on the condensers and the field distance setting. 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 536 Chapter 537
64 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1500 Application 3roller and 4roller double apron draft system for roving frames. With top apron cradle OH 514 for cotton and synthetic fibres up to approx. 45 mm length. With cradle OH 534 for very long cotton fibres and synthetics of poor draft properties up to 54 mm. With cradle OH 524 for synthetics up to approx. 60 mm fibre length. See as well chapter 9, page 81. Types Ref.No. Weighting element Loads in dan For top roller Ø mm PK Front Middle Rear PK Front Middle Rear PK Front Middle Middle Rear Clearer roller holders 1) Front of arm Ref.no. Lateral 2,3,4 Ref. No. Application PFE PPH ) PK as well as PK , specially for longer fibres. PFE PPH ) PFE PPH ) PK with top apron cradles OH 514 for fibres up to approx. 45 mm Roving frames PK PK PK Cotton mills Dimensions are shown in mm. Distances for top roller holders are shown in mm. 1) Clearer roller holders are delivered separately on special order. 2) Can also be used as lateral 1. Chapter 538 Chapter 539
65 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1500 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arms PK and PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft field setting 3) Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 100 LP /3 110 LP /3 130 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR OH (OH medium) PR LP OH (OH long) PR OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR Position in weighting arm 2) Draft field settings and max.fibre length Weighting Top apron Field distances in mm Max.fibre arm PK cradle OH HF VF VF GF mm length min usual 4) max. mm PK OH ) OH ) OH ) PK OH ) OH ) OH ) Clips for OH 514 for OH 534 for OH 524 PK PK OLC white, OLC black, OLC green 1) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 2 3 = Rear 3 Bottom roller Front I 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 25/27 (mere reference values) Rear III 30/32 3) The mentioned draft field distances take a front zone condenser into account. Without front zone condenser the front zone (HF) can be shortened. 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 540 Chapter 541
66 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1500 Equipment and draft system data Cotton roving frames Equipment for weighting arm PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: Position in weighting arm 2) 100 LP /2/4 110 LP /2/4 130 LP /2/4 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 100 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH short) PR LP PK Draft field settings and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Fibre PK cradle OH HF Con VF VF GF mm length stant 3) min usual 4) max. mm PK OH ) Clips for OH 514 OLC white, OLC black, OLC green 1) Ref. Nos.mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. In case of 4rollertype PK top roller combination is mm and top roller types are LP1015 LP1015 LP 1017 LP Normally the OH 514 top apron cradle is used. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front 1 Bottom roller Front l 30/32 dia. in mm Middle II 30/32 (mere refe Middle III 30/32 rence values) Rear IV 30/32 3) The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers depending on the PKconstruction. Enlarged distances depend on the (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 2 condensers and the field distance setting. 3 = Middle 3 4) The distance VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. 4 = Rear 4 The values are gathered in practical use. Chapter 542 Chapter 543
67 Texparts Weighting arm PK 6000 Application Types Ref.no. PK ) Mono clearer roller holder Ref.no. Remarks Ring spinning machine 3roller double apron draft system PK With top apron cradle OH 6022 for all kinds of wool and synthetic fibres up to 200 mm. Blends of these. Preparation: Classical worsted yarn assortment with finishing machine or worsted roving frame. Operating Load on top roller (dan) pressure Front 1 Middle 2 Rear 3 from 1,5 bar up to 4,0 bar Top roller for PK 6000 Ø mm 2) PKHA ) Mono clearer roller Ref. no. PKPW ) 2 pcs. front clearer roller holders are needed for each weighting arm, one per clearer roller for gauges 75mm and 82.5mm 2 pcs. clearer rollers are needed for each weighting arm See as well chapter 9, page 92. PK PKHA ) PKPW ) Ring spinning machines Roving frames Dimensions are shown in mm. Worsted mills 1) Pneumatic loading; air pressure required. 2) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. 3) Clearer roller holder PKHA will be supplied on request as separate item. Chapter 544 Chapter 545
68 Texparts Weighting arm PK 6000 Equipment and draft system data Worsted ring spinning machines Equipment for weighting arm PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref. No. Position in weighting arm 2) Front and rear top roller: 75 LP / LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø 33 mm): 75 OH PR LP OH PR LP PK Dimensions are shown in mm. Clips For normal bottom apron nose bar: OLC black, OLC beige, OLC green Weighting arms, draft field distances and max. fibre length 1) Ref.Nos.mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 3 = Rear Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter Draft field mm Total draft I II III HF VF VF usual field GF mm 3) Without rear zone condenser the rear zone setting reduces to 45 mm at min. 4) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Fibre length max. mm PK OH /40 27/30,5 35/ ) 4) Chapter 546 Chapter 547
69 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1660 Application Ring spinning machine 3roller double apron draft system PK Apron top roller as recessed roller. With top apron cradle OH 2402 or OH 554: all kinds of wool and synthetic fibres up to 200 mm. Blends of these. Preparation: Classical worsted yarn assortment with finishing machine or worsted roving frame. See as well chapter 9, page 103. Types Loads in dan For top Ref.no. roller Ø mm 1) PK Front Middle Rear Clearer roller holder 2) Front of arm Ref.no. PFE PK Ring spinning machines Roving frames Worsted mills 1) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. Dimensions are shown in mm. 2) Clearer roller holders will be supplied on request as separate items. Condensers are shown on chapter 5 pages Chapter 548 Chapter 549
70 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1660 Equipment and draft system data Worsted ring spinning machines Equipment for weighting arm PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 75 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR LP Position in weighting arm 2) PK Clips For normal bottom apron nose bar: OLC black, OLC beige, OLC green. Weighting arms, draft field distances and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GFmax. length mm OH min. usual 3) mm Slip draft with bottom apron nose bar: PK OH ) ) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 3 = Rear 3) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Chapter 550 Chapter 551
71 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1601 Application Ring spinning machine 3roller double apron draft system PK Apron top roller as recessed roller. With top apron cradle OH 2402 or OH 554: all kinds of wool and synthetic fibres up to 200 mm. Blends of these. Preparation: Classical worsted yarn assortment with finishing machine or worsted roving frame. Types Loads in dan For top Ref.no. roller Ø mm 1) PK Front Middle Rear Clearer roller holder 2) Front of arm Ref.no. PFE See as well chapter 9, page 114 PK Ring spinning machines Roving frames Worsted mills 1) Dia. values refer to newly covered top rollers. Dimensions are shown in mm. 2) Clearer roller holders will be supplied on request as separate items. Condensers are shown on chapter 5 pages Chapter 552 Chapter 553
72 Texparts Weighting arms PK 1601 Equipment and draft system data Worsted ring spinning machines Equipment for weighting arm PK (Equipment is not included in delivery volume of weighting arm) Draft system setting Gauge Tw in mm Top apron cradle OH Apron Top roller 1) (without cot) Ref.No. Front and rear top roller: 75 LP / LP /3 90 LP /3 Top apron cradle, apron and apron top roller with cot (aprons for top roller Ø = 25 mm): 75 OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR LP OH (OH medium) PR OH (OH short) PR LP Position in weighting arm 2) PK Clips For normal bottom apron nose bar: OLC black, OLC beige, OLC green. Weighting arms, draft field distances and max. fibre length Weighting arm Top apron Field distances in mm Max. fibre PK cradle HF VF VF GFmax. length mm OH min. usual 3) mm Slip draft with bottom apron nose bar: PK OH ) ) Ref.Nos. mentioned are for top rollers without cots. Cot quality according to customers' request. 2) Position in weighting arm: 1 = Front (see fig. on next page) 2 = Middle 3 = Rear 3) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Chapter 554 Chapter 555
73 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 2022 Application Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000 and Series PK Also designated as short OH Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR 28 OLC yellow PR 28 OLC lilac PR 28 OLC white OH 2022 OH 2022 Ring spinning machines Cotton mills 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 556 Chapter 557
74 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 62 Application Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw 1) L b d Top aprons 2) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 3) R E Ref.no. Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 2000 and Series PK OH PR 32 OLC OLC OLC yellow lilac white Also designated as short OH. OH 62 OH 62 Ring spinning machines Cotton mills 1) OH 62 cradles with gauges 68.4 mm, 75 mm and 82.5 mm have been replaced by OH 2022 top apron cradles. 2) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 3) Set of distance clips for OH 62. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 558 Chapter 559
75 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 2042 Application Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000 and Series PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR 2813 OLC red PR 2813 OLC yellow OLC white Also designated as medium OH. Ring spinning machines Cotton mills OH 2042 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Distance clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 560 Chapter 561
76 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 132 Application Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 2000 and Series PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH ) OH ) OH Top aprons 2) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 3) R E Ref.no PR 283 OLC red PR 323 OLC yellow PR 323 OLC white Also designated as medium OH. Ring spinning machines Cotton mills OH 132 1) Delivery until usingup of stock. OH 132 2) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 3) Set of distance clips for OH 132. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 562 Chapter 563
77 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 1225 Application Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 3025, PK Also designated as long OH. Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH * OH * OH * Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR 028 OLC yellow PR 032 OLC white PR 032 OLC grey Ring spinning machines Cotton mills * Available on request! OH 1225 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 564 Chapter 565
78 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 122 Application Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 2000 and Series PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR 028 OLC yellow PR 032 OLC white PR 032 OLC grey Also designated as long OH. Ring spinning machines Cotton mills OH 122 OH 122 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH 122. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 566 Chapter 567
79 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 5022 Application Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 5000, PK 1550 Also designated as short OH. Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no PR PR 40 OLC OLC OLC white black green Roving frames Cotton mills OH 5022 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH Chapter 568 Chapter 569
80 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 514 Application Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no. Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 1500 OH OH OH OH PR PR PR PR 40 OLC OLC OLC white black green Also designated as short OH. Roving frames Cotton mills OH 514 OH 514 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH 514. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH 514. Chapter 570 Chapter 571
81 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 5042 Application Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no. Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 5000, PK OH PR 4010 OLC OLC OLC white black green Also designated as medium OH. Roving frames Cotton mills OH 5042 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH Chapter 572 Chapter 573
82 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 534 Application Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK Also designated as medium OH. Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c OH OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no PR 4010 OLC white PR 4010 OLC black PR 4010 OLC green Roving frames Cotton mills OH 534 OH 534 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter For apron top roller with 33 mm diameter PR 407 is applicable. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH 534. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH 534. Chapter 574 Chapter 575
83 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 5245 Application Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no. Cotton roving frame draft systems with TEXParts weighting arms PK 5000, PK OH PR 4011 OLC OLC OLC white black green Also designated as long OH. Roving frames Cotton mills OH 5245 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH Chapter 576 Chapter 577
84 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 524 Application Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK Also designated as long OH. Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b c OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) d R E Ref.no PR PR 4011 OLC OLC OLC white black green Roving frames Cotton mills OH 524 OH 524 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 25 mm diameter. For apron top roller with 33 mm diameter PR 408 is applicable. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH 524. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Two identic clips are needed per each OH 524. Chapter 578 Chapter 579
85 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 2402 Application Worsted ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 1660, PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) Ref.no. PR 3217 OLC black PR 4017 OLC beige OLC green Ring spinning machines OH 2402 OH 2402 Worsted mills 1) Top apron roller with 48 mm diameter. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 580 Chapter 581
86 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 554 Application Worsted ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 1660, PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR 32/5 OLC black PR 40/5 OLC beige PR 40/5 OLC green Ring spinning machines Worsted mills OH 554 OH 554 1) Top apron for apron top roller with 48 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH 554. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 582 Chapter 583
87 Texparts Top apron cradles OH 6022 Application Worsted ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK Cradle Dimensions Types in mm Ref.no. Tw L b d OH OH Top aprons 1) Basic equipment Colour Distance clips 2) R E Ref.no PR OLC black PR OLC beige OLC green Ring spinning machines Worsted mills OH 6022 OH ) Top apron for apron top roller with 33 mm diameter. Top aprons must be ordered as separate items. 2) Set of distance clips for OH Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. Chapter 584 Chapter 585
88 Texparts Bottom apron nose bar Texparts Bottom apron nose bar Application Profile P1 1) short version Profile P3 1) long version Cotton ring spinning machine draft systems with Texparts weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000 and Series PK Cotton roving frame draft systems with Texparts weighting arms PK 5000, PK 1500 and PK Profile P2 1) medium version Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills 1) Completely machined: dimensions and surface finish as specified by customer. 1) Completely machined: dimensions and surface finish as specified by customer. Chapter 586 Chapter 587
89 Accotex Aprons for Short Staple Ring Spinning Accotex Aprons for Long Staple Ring Spinning Roving and Spinning Aprons Roving Aprons Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer Inner Layer Example Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer Inner Layer Example General purpose top and bottom apron High performance top and bottom apron 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics 100% Cotton, Blends, Synthetics 78210* grey grey 78210G grey blue General purpose top and bottom apron High performance top and bottom apron Wool, Synthetics Wool, Synthetics 78210* grey grey 78210G grey blue Finisseur Aprons Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer Inner Layer Example Carpet Spinning Aprons Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer Top and bottom apron Inner Layer Synthetics 78210* grey grey Example General purpose top and bottom apron General purpose top and bottom apron cordless Wool, Synthetics, Blends Wool, Synthetics, Blends 78210* grey grey NO 78210*X grey blue Spinning Aprons Top and bottom apron Synthetics NO9020 light grey dark grey Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer General purpose top and bottom apron Wool, Synthetics, Blends Inner Layer 78210* grey grey Example High performance top and bottom apron Wool, Synthetics, Blends 78210G grey blue Chapter 588 Chapter 589
90 Texparts Roving guides, condensers Application Types Ref.no. 1) Roving guides/condensers Used in draft Symbol Remarks systems Ring spinning machine 3 roller double apron draft systems. Roving frame 3 roller double apron draft systems. Roving frame 4 roller double apron draft systems. KL KL * KL * KL * KL * Rear roving guide Front zone condenser Cotton Ring spinning machines for PK 2055, PK 2065, PK 2155, PK 2165 Roving frames PK 400, PK 500, PK 600, PK 700,PK 800, PK 1600, PK 1500, PK 1550, PK ) suited for profile 12 x 4 mm 6 yellow 9 uncoloured 12 black 16 green Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills 1) Products marked with * at Ref.no. are stamped with Texparts characters for designation. 2) Colour mark indicates size. Chapter 590 Chapter 591
91 Texparts Roving guides, condensers Application Types Gauge Roving guides/ Ref.no. 1) mm Condensers Used in draft systems Swinging leg Ref.no. Ring spinning machines 3 roller double apron draft systems KL * Front zone condenser; KL * 82.5 swinging legs are KL * springsuspended KL * Front zone condenser; KL * 82.5 swinging legs are held KL * by slotted cheese head screws Worsted Ring spinning machine PK 600, PK 1601, PK1660, (swinging leg right hand) and PK 6000 series (swinging leg left hand) Worsted Ring spinning machine PK 600, PK 1601, PK 1660 (swinging leg right hand) and PK 6000 series (swinging leg left hand) KL KL KL KL KL KL PFE ) Spring Ring spinning machines Worsted mills PFE ) Products marked with * at Ref.no. are stamped with Texparts characters for designation. 2) Retaining spring for all front zone condensers for PK 1600, PK 1700 series. Chapter 592 Chapter 593
92 Texparts Roving guides, condensers Application Types Ref.no. Roving guides/condensers Used in draft Symbol Remarks systems Ring spinning machines with 3 and more roller draft systems. KL Rear zone condenser Worsted Ring spinning machines PK 1601, PK 1660 and PK 6000 series Roving frames with 3 and more roller draft systems. Ring spinning machines Worsted mills Chapter 594 Chapter 595
93 Texparts Distance clips OLC Texparts Distance clips OLC Application Types Ref.no. Symbol Colour Types Ref.no. Symbol Colour Application For top apron cradles in draft systems with weighting arms Series PK 3000, Series PK 2000 and Series PK PK 700, PK 800, PK 1700, PK 1600, PK 1660, PK For centersupport. OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC red chrome yellow yellow lilac white light green grey turquoise black OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC red yellow white grey black orange beige green For top apron cradles in draft systems with weighting arms PK 1600, PK 1500, PK 1550 and PK 5000 series. OLC and OLC to OLC are for lateral support. OLC to OLC , used in short bottom apron systems with UH 54, for worsted draft systems with weighting arms type PK 1660, PK 1601 are for centersupport. OLC beige OLC blue OLC OLC green pink OLC brown Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Semiworsted mills Worsted mills OLC OLC blue brown OLC OLC OLC OLC black beige green pink Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Worsted mills Chapter 596 Chapter 597
94 Texparts Setting tools Texparts Setting tools Application Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Application For draft systems with weighting arms PK 3025 and PK See also chapter 5 pages 25. Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Screwdriver SW Ratchet 1/4" (handle reversible) Pliers for cover Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Distance gauge Height setting gauge For draft systems with weighting arms PK 2025, PK 2035, PK 2055 and PK See also chapter 5 pages * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Allen key (key 4) Allen key (key 3) Spanner (size 8) Ballscrew driver SW3 Height setting gauge Setting wrench Screwdriver (SW 5 with handle) Allen key (key 4) Optional accessories: * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Height control gauge Ratchet 1 / 4 " Ring spinning machines Torque wrench 1 / 4 " with adapter (225 Nm) Optional accessories: Screwdriver bit SW SW Ring spinning machines Tube cutter Slide calipers with prism Cotton mills Torque wrench with jaws Cotton mills adapter 3 / 8 " 1 / 4 " (550 Nm) Chapter 598 Chapter 599
95 Texparts Setting tools Texparts Setting tools Application Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Application For draft systems with weighting arms PK 2130, PK 2135, PK 2155 and PK Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Tool set with bag Draft field gauge For draft systems with weighting arms PK 1550 and PK See also chapter 5 pages 613. Distance gauge Height setting gauge See also chapter 5 pages 2833 and Height setting gauge 1) Setting wrench * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Ring spinning machines Setting wrench Screwdriver (SW 5 with handle) Allen key (key 4) Optional accessories: Ratchet 1 / 4 " Screwdriver bit SW SW Slide calipers with prism jaws Allen key (key 5) Spanner Ratchet 1 / 4 " Screw driverbit SW 6 Optional accessories: Screwdriverbit SW 5 Screwdriver SW 6 * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Ring spinning machines Roving frames Cotton mills Slide calipers Cotton mills with prism jaws Worsted mills Chapter 5100 Chapter 5101
96 Texparts Setting tools Texparts Setting tools Application Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Application For draft systems with weighting arms PK 1500 and PK See also chapter 5 pages 3843 and Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Height setting gauge Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Height setting gauge Screwdriver SW For draft systems with weighting arms PK See also chapter 5 pages Setting wrench Allen key (key 5) Ratchet 1/4" (handle reversible) Pliers for cover * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Spanner Ratchet 1 / 4 " Spanner (size 8) Allen key (key 5) Allen key (key 4) * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Screw driverbit SW 6 Optional accessories: Pliers for fitting of the connecting tube Height control gauge Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Ring spinning machines Roving frames Screwdriverbit SW 5 Screwdriver SW 6 Slide calipers with prism jaws Torque wrench with adapter (225 Nm) Optional accessories: Tube cutter Torque wrench with adapter 3 / 8 " 1 / 4 " Ring spinning machines Worsted mills Cotton mills Worsted mills (550 Nm) Chapter 5102 Chapter 5103
97 Texparts Setting tools Texparts Pneumatic accessories for PK 3000 Application Setting* Types Symbol tools Ref.no. Special Types Symbol accessories Ref.no. Application For draft systems with weighting arms PK See also chapter 5 pages Tool set with bag Draft field gauge Screwdriver SW Ratchet 1/4" (handle reversible) Connecting piece Tconnector Lconnector For draft systems with weighting arms PK 3025 and PK Pliers for cover * Setting tools can be supplied individually or as a complete set in a tool bag ( ). Optional accessories: These tools are supplied on special request. Spanner (SW 8) Allen key (key 4) Allen key (key 5) Pliers for fitting of the connecting tube Height setting gauge Pneumatic unit )2) with air filter, automatic condensate separator and pressure monitor Height control gauge Torque wrench with insert (225 Nm) Roving frames Optional accessories: Ring spinning machines Tube cutter Cotton mills Torque wrench with adapter 3 / 8 " 1 / 4 " Cotton mills (550 Nm) Chapter 5104 Chapter 5105
98 Texparts Pneumatic accessories for PK 5000 and PK 6000 Application For draft systems with weighting arms PK 5000 and PK Special Types Symbol accessories Ref.no. End piece Tconnector Lconnector Pneumatic unit ) Pneumatic unit )2) Ring spinning machines Cotton mills 1) with air filter and automatic condensate separator 2) with pressure monitor Chapter 5106
99 Texparts Products for Rotor Spinning 6 Rotor spindles Beater spindles Bearing units 1) 1) Further products for rotor spinning see chapter 3. Chapter 61
100 Texparts Rotor spindles TL Elastic bush EB Application Rotor spindle Ref.no. Speed n max. min 1 Rotor spindles for Rotor spinning machines Rieter M 1/1 and M 2/1. TL ) TE Elastic bush EB TL Rotor spinning machines EB TE Cotton mills 1) spindle oillubricated Chapter 62 Chapter 63
101 Texparts Rotor spindles TL Application Rotor spindle Ref.no. Spindle version Ref.no. Speed n max min 1 Weight kg For Rotor spinning machines Platt Saco Lowell types 883, 885 and 887. TL ) B 1)2) TL Rotor spinning machines Cotton mills 1) Spindle version B: oillubricated 2) Only for machine type 883 and 887 side feed conversion. 3) Replacement for TL Chapter 64 Chapter 65
102 Texparts Beater spindle LE Application Beater spindle Ref.no. Beater spindle LE 222 for Rotor spinning machines RU 11 and RU 14 of Messrs. Rieter Ingolstadt LE Beater spindle with wharve Ref.no. LE LE LE Rotor spinning machines Cotton mills Chapter 66 Chapter 67
103 Texparts Beater spindle LE Application Beater spindle for Rotor spinning machines of Messrs. Schlafhorst. Beater spindle with wharve Ref.No. suitable for spin box type LE SE 8 LE SE 8 LE SE 9 LE SE 10/11 LE LE Rotor spinning machines Cotton mills LE LE Chapter 68 Chapter 69
104 Texparts Bearing units IL Application Types Ref.no. Dimensions in mm d D D 1 D 2 A Speed Load fig. Weight n max in N per row kg A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 S S 1 min 1 C C 0 Bearing units for support rolls in Rotor spinning machines IL IL IL IL IL IL IL , IL IL IL IL IL Rotor spinning machines Cotton mills IL IL Chapter 610 Chapter 611
105 Texparts Bearing units ZB Texparts Bearing units ZL Application Types Dimensions Weight Ref.no. in mm kg A A 2 D 2 d N Types Ref.no. Application For rotor spinning machine Schlafhorst belt guide roll ZB ZL For rotor spinning machine Schlafhorst belt guide roll ZB See also chapter 2 page 8. ZL Rotor spinning machines Rotor spinning machines Cotton mills Cotton mills Chapter 612 Chapter 613
106
107 Texparts Products for Filament Processing 7 Bearing units for texturizing aggregates Counter rolls Separator rolls Lubricating equipment and accessories for separator rolls Daytex Texturizing cots Chapter 71
108 Texparts False twist assemblies FL Application Bearings for friction texturing assemblies. Types Dimensions in mm Ref.no. d d 1 D 1 G SW A FL ) 8.1 M5 24 M 21x Load fig. in N Weight A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 S S 1 C C 0 kg Texturizing machines FL Filament processing mills 1) Delivery until usingup of stock. Chapter 72 Chapter 73
109 Texparts Counter rolls CK with bearing units FL Application Types Ref.no. Weight Remarks kg Types Weight Remarks Ref.no. kg As counter roll in magnetic and friction assemblies. Counter rolls serve to stabilize the tangential belt in texturizing machines. CK Counter roll with bracket is composed of CK , bracket CHT , nut FMT , and cap FKA CK Counter roll with lap protection and wharve dia. 25 mm, with wharve CWL CWL Wharve for CK Key face 22 mm Texturizing machines Filament processing mills CK CK CWL Chapter 74 Chapter 75
110 Texparts Counter rolls CK with bearing units FL Texparts False twist assemblies FL Application Types Weight Remarks Ref.no. kg Types Load fig. in N Weight Ref.no. C C 0 kg Application As counter roll in friction assemblies. CK Counter roll complete Bearing for counter roll is FL FL FL FL FL Bearing Units for friction texturizing assemblies. Key face 22 mm. FL with plastic ring FL with plastic ring Texturizing machines Texturizing machines CK Filament processing mills FL FL Filament processing mills without plastic ring without plastic ring Chapter 76 Chapter 77
111 Texparts False twist assemblies FL Texparts False twist assemblies FL Guidici Application Types Load fig. in N Weight Ref.no. C C 0 kg Types Load fig. in N Weight Ref.no. C C 0 kg Application Bearing Units FL 15 for friction texturizing assemblies. FL FL FL FL Bearing units FL 18 for friction texturizing assemblies. Texturizing machines Texturizing machines Filament processing mills FL FL FL FL Filament processing mills Chapter 78 Chapter 79
112 Texparts Separator rolls VR Application Types Version C on Dimensions Ref.no. roll in mm surface 1) d 2 d 1 d H E F Weight kg Remarks Separator rolls for use in draw roll systems on draw twisters and draw winders. VR A VR A VR B VR B VR B VR C VR C VR D VR A VR A VR B VR B M M ) Threads run on a hardchrome plated outside surface; orangepeel effect of surface provides optimum conditions of friction. Shell is nondetachable. Lubricating and lubricating equipment for separator rolls see chapter 8 page 8. VR Version A VR Version C Draw twisters Draw winders Filament processing mills VR Version B VR Version D Chapter 710 Chapter 711
113 Texparts Separator rolls VR Application Types C on Dimensions Ref.no. roll in mm surface d 2 d 1 d H E F Weight kg Remarks Separator roll for use in draw roll systems on draw twisters and draw winders. VR ) CK Complete separator roll Bearing for VR Shell is detachable. Draw twisters Draw winders Filament processing mills Separator roll VR ) The plastic cover with reference number VDE must be used for the VR and the CK Chapter 712 Chapter 713
114 Texparts Lubricating equipment and accessories for separator rolls VR Daytex Texturizing Cots Application For lubricating separator rolls VR. For information on lubricating intervals and lubricants see chapter 8 page 8. Item Types For Ref.no. VR types Lubricating device Pin Plastic cover 1) VDE (ivory) for all VR types VR 1 to VR 11 for temperatures up to 70 C on roll surface VR 3, VR 4 and VR 7 for Plastic cover 1) VDE temperatures (red) between 70 and 100 or 130 C resp. Texturizing Cots Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Cot for high Synthetics 121 black 70 speed texturing machines Cot for high speed texturing machines Synthetics S880 salmon 72 Texturizing Aprons Applications Fibre Product Outer Layer Inner Layer General purpose Synthetics 4347 red grey Apron for high speed machines (e.g. Barmag Synthetics 203 grey light grey Example Example Apron for high speed machines (e.g. Murata) Synthetics 775 green light grey Texturizing Sleeves Draw twisters Draw winders Applications Fibre Product Colour Shore A Hardness Example Filament processing mills 1) for spare orders. General purpose Synthetics TW450 grey 65 Chapter 714 Chapter 715
115
116 Recommendations and practical informations 8 Lubrication and servicing Testing and measuring Bearing units for textile machines Chapter 81
117 Lubrication of products for textile machines Types Lubri Quantity of Speed Lubrication cant Lubricant max. intervals g/bearing rpm. Operating hrs. min. max. h Types Lubri Quantity of Speed Lubrication cant Lubricant max. intervals g/bearing rpm. Operating hrs. min. max. h Tape tension pulleys SR SR A/B SR A/B SR A/B SR A/B SR A/B SR A/B SR M SR M SR M SR A/B SR A/B SR M SR M Contact roll assemblies AR for ring frames with tangential belt drive AR 28 A/B > AR 45 A/B AR 5047 M (belt width ~40mm max.) AR 3528 M (belt width 20mm max.) AR for ring frames with sectional drive or belt width up to 16mm max. AR A/B AR A/B AR A/B AR 5024 M Bearing units SR A/B SR A/B SR A/B SR 23 with black cap A/B cap 1) : SR 24 with black cap A/B full SR 35 with black cap A/B lubrication FR A/B ZB 7 A/B ZL 7 A/B ZL 17 E DR A/B DR A/B ) Lubrication interval: every operating hrs. 4 to 5 rotations at the cap. Lubricant A Texparts grease TG 2 available in containers of 5 kg Ref. No B A high grade lithium base rolling bearing grease having the following properties: Worked penetration: ~265 to 295 mm/10 at 25 C, Dropping point: ~190 C; Worked temperature range: 30 to +120 C C Texparts grease TG 5 available in containers of 5 kg Ref. No D E M A (Ba or Ca) complex soap grease having the following properties: Worked penetration: ~220 to 300 mm/10 at 25 C; Dropping point: > 200 C; Worked temperature range: ~ 30 C to 150 C Mystik JT6, produced by Messrs. Hermann Hölterhoff ChemischTechnische Fabrik, P.O. Box , Solingen Asonic GHY 72 produced by Klüber Lubrication München KG, Geisenhausener Strasse München Chapter 82 Chapter 83
118 Types Lubri Quantity of Speed Lubrication cant Lubricant max. intervals g/bearing rpm. Operating time h Types Lubri Operation Lubrication Viscosity cant intervals class Operating to ISO hrs. h Top roller bearings for ring and roving frames Top rollers LP LP 1002 C/D full lubrication < LP 302 LP 1016, LP 1017 C/D full lubrication < LP 1014, LP 1015 LP 1003, LP 303 Lifetime lubricated, maintenance free Spindle bearing units CS1, CS1 S G VG 10 CS1 12 G with ring and traveller VG 46 1) HF 1 G spindle speed up to min VG 10 HF 21 G exceeding min VG 10 HF3 G with ring and traveller VG 10 HF3 2) with suppressed balloon VG 68 HF 44 G with ring and traveller VG 10 HZ 440 G without ring and traveller VG 10 Bottom roller bearings UL UL C/D full lubrication < HF 44 2) G with suppressed balloon VG 68 The oil level should be checked on a random sample of spindles after half the number of operating hours shown. The roller bearing should be thoroughly coated with oil before putting the spindle into service, and also at each relubrication operation! 1) ISO VG 46 for all yarn counts (for finer yarn counts higher than Nm 24 ISO VG 22 can also be used) 2) Special execution of damping spiral Lubricant Lubricant C Texparts grease TG 5 available in containers of 5kg Ref. No D Barium or Calcium complex soap grease having the following properties: Worked penetration: ~220 to 300 mm/10 at 25 C; Dropping point: > 200 C; Worked temperature range: ~ 30 C to 150 C G Solvent refined highgrade oil with good antiwear properties and containing antioxidant and anticorrossion additives as per DIN CLP. Chapter 84 Chapter 85
119 Spindle Lubri Lubric. interval after operating hrs. Viscosity Bearing units cant For axial load A 1) class Types <3,5 dan >3,5 dan to ISO h h HZ 33 G VG 10 HZ 35, HF 45 G VG 22 Identification of spindle bearing sizes and immersed depth of spindle blade Spindle bearing unit sizes may be identified from the following dimensions: III Spindle Lubri Lubric. interval after operating hrs. Viscosity Bearing units cant For axial load A 1) class Types <3,5 dan 3,55 dan 58 dan >8 dan to ISO h h h h VG 10 HZ 55 G VG VG VG 10 HZ 66, HZ 68 G VG ) VG VG 10 HZ 77 G VG ) VG 46 The oil level should be checked on a random sample of spindles after half the number of operating hours mentioned. The types HZ 33, HZ 35 and HF 45 are provided for application in double twist spindles. With types HZ 55 to HZ 77, for spinning or twisting with suppressed yarn balloon (e.g. with spinner or twister head on the spindle) use oil with the viscositiy class ISO VG 100. The roller bearing should be thoroughly coated with oil before putting the spindle into service, and also at each relubrication. 1) Axial Load A = Weight of full bobbin plus spindle blade assembly. 2) Carry out an initial oil change after spindles have been run in for 50 hours. Lubricant G Solvent refined highgrade oil with good antiwear properties and containing antioxidant and anticorrosion additives as per DIN CLP. Conical foot shape (I) with blade tip Cylindrical foot shape (II) with tapered blade Cylindrical foot shape (III) with spherical tip P = blade diameter at roller bearing height R = external diameter of spindle bearing head Q = diameter of shaft foot. Oil filling Immersed depth of spindle Spindle Foot P R Q blade in mm Type shape max. min. CS1, CS1 S III CS1 12 III 6,8 16, HF1 I HF 21 I HF 3 I HZ 33 II HZ 35 II HF 44, HZ 440 II HF 45 II HZ 55 II HZ 66 II HZ 68 II HZ 77 II Chapter 86 Chapter 87
120 Types Lubri Speed Lubrication C on VR cant min 1 intervals outside Operating hrs. of shells 1) h of VR/CK Types Lubri Lubrication intervals Quantity of Rotor spindle TL cant in operating hrs. Lubricant h at rpm Separator rolls VR and bearing unit CK 12 for temperatures up to 70 C Oillubricated rotor spindle: VR , VR VR , VR VR , VR ) VR , VR VR CK H up to up to 70 up to up to 70 up to up to 70 up to up to 70 up to up to 70 TL ) L ,25 cm 3 1) Combine relubrication with cleaning of bypass filter. The bypass filter (filter cover) covers the opening above the relubricating bore of the rotor spindle housing. TL 226 Lubricant L: Separator rolls VR for temperatures between 70 to 130 C VR ),VR ) J up to VR ) J up to up to VR J up to ) up to ) Shape of lubricating hole Oil Isoflex PDP 65 produced by: Klüber Lubrication München KG; Geisenhausener Strasse München 1) In the temperature range between C on outside surface of the shell, the lubricating intervals have to be reduced to 2/3 of the indicated values. 2) Speed range up to min 1 3) These types are provided with a red plastic cap. 4) Outer ring temperature <100 C. 5) Outer ring temperature <130 C. Viscosity classes Viscosity Mean kinematic Limits of kinematic classes viscosity viscosity according at 40.0 C at 40,0 C to ISO mm 2 /s (cst) mm 2 /s (cst) min. max. VG VG Lubricant H J Isoflex Super LDS 18 Dispersion 25 S produced by: Klüber Lubrication München KG; Geisenhausener Strasse München Attention! Inflammable, dangerous material class A II. Please observe warning advice. Unisilkon TK 44 N000 produced by: Klüber Lubrication München KG; Geisenhausener Strasse München VG VG VG Under the international SI system, kinematic viscosity is expressed in m 2 /s. The relationship between this unit and the figures given in Centistokes (cst) is 10 6 m 2 /s = 1 mm 2 /s = 1 cst. Thus, the mm 2 /s column in the table corresponds to the values Centistokes (cst). Chapter 88 Chapter 89
121 Lubricating apparatus for lubrication of Texparts spindle bearing units The lubricating apparatus is conceived for the original lubrication and the maintenance of Texparts spindle bearing units CS, HF, and HZ. It is suitable for all spindle sizes. The lubricating pump is activated by an electric motor drive system. For the description of the components please see the figure below. 1 Drainage screw 6 Control unit 10 Connecting plug for fresh oil 7 Place to deposit 11 Manometer 2 Fresh oil tank top part of spindle 12 Oil level display 3 Used oil tank 8 Receiver for nozzle 13 Lubricating nozzle 4 Return oil tube (thick) 9 Filling tube 14 Lubricating adapter 5 Fresh oil tube for fresh oil (thin) The operation principle of the spindle lubricating apparatus is based on the supply of clean oil and the suctioning of used oil at the same time. The two tanks, one for new oil (2) and one for used oil, have a capacity of 20 l each. Transparent tubes (4) and (5) are connecting each tank with the lubricating nozzle (13), which is provided with a lubricating adapter, matching the respective spindle type and size. When the lubricating adapter is inserted into the spindle bearing unit, oil channels will open automatically and by activating the pump the spindle bearing unit can be filled up with new oil. During relubrication the new oil fed in will push the used oil out of the spindle bearing unit, due to its sealing system. The used oil will be returned to the used oil tank through the transparent tube. By this process a thorough rinsing of the spindle bearing unit can be assured as well as the coating of the roller bearing with new oil. In addition the required oil level will adjust automatically. Lubricating apparatus Chapter 810 Chapter 811
122 Lubrication of spindle bearing units SMM BIFLEX Ordering top rollers with Accotex cots Types: SMM 32 SMM 42 Oil filling amount (ccm) 28 ccm 26 ccm Viscosity and lubricating interval All spindles with SMM BIFLEX spindle bearing units are developed and manufactured according to customer's demands. For each application a special decision has to be made considering spindle speed and load, what kind of viscosity and lubrication interval is needed to achieve always the best possible spindle performance. Lubricant Lubrificant only with a solvent refined highgrade oil with good antiwear properties and containing antioxidant and anti corrosion additives. The roller bearings should be thoroughly coated with oil at each relubrication. Further informations regarding the lubrication of SMM spindle bearing units BIFLEX upon request. Accotex as a specialist for spinning cots and aprons provides a wide range of cot qualities with different Shore hardnesses to suit the different mill requirements. The most influential factors in cot performance are the fiber material being processed, the load used on the top roller, the surface finish & preparation, the cot maintenance work and the spinning room temperature and humidity. Accotex will be pleased to assist customers by making the right choice for the best balanced cot quality for all individual mill requirements. Further Accotex can provide recommendations for the correct handling and maintenance of the spinning cots. Upon customer s request, Texparts will supply top rollers with Accotex cots, ready ground, for immediate installation in the weighting arm. Accotex cots are available in a wide range of rubber qualities and Shore hardnesses. The majority of cots used in today s spinning mills worldwide are Pressfit cots. Pressfit cots are an Accotex invention. Because of the aluminum tube they run virtually tension free, provide minimized internal stress to the rubber material and offer optimized rubber wall thickness. The result is a high performance cot with long durability. Ref. No. of basic top roller type (without cot) Quality of cot or shore hardness Cot diameter (ready ground) Cot width In the case of recessed apron top rollers: recess width and recess depth (see chapter 9, page 127). d 1 = diameter of outer ring in mm d 2 = diameter of cot in mm b = width of cot in mm E = width of outer ring in mm Chapter 812 Chapter 813
123 Hardness of the cots The most commonly used hardness range for cots is from 63 to 83 Shore A. The customary type of Shore sclerometer (according to DIN ) can be used for testing the Shore hardness of synthetic cots. Fitting the cots When fitting or removing the cots, make sure that no axial pressure is applied to the ball bearings of the top roller. Cots with metal or plastic bushes Fitting and removing these cots is done mechanically or pneumatically with commercially available fitting and removal press devices. For fitting the cots, the press devices recommended by the cot manufacturers should be used. In no case an expander cone should be used to pressfit the cots with metal bushes. Lubrication of bottom roller bearings Texparts bottom roller bearings are being supplied readygreased with Texparts grease TG 5, or ungreased on customers demand. Details for relubrication (see chapter 8, page 4). Relubrication of all types of Texparts bottom roller bearings should be carried out with a grease gun by pressing the grease slowly into the bearing while the machine is running. Types and Ref. No. of Texparts grease guns and nozzles can be seen on chapter 4, page 10. For information on lubricants and lubricating intervals see chapter 8 page 4. Fitting cots Cots with metal bush Removing used cots Grease gun Cots with metal or plastic bushes Used cots with metal or plastic bushes are removed with a pressing tool. No special cleaning is required after removing an old bush and prior to mounting the new bush. Chapter 814 Chapter 815
124 Tension pulleys Bearing units for texturizing aggregates Texparts manufactures tension pulleys or contact roll assemblies with 2line ball bearings or with ball/roller row for belt drives in various textile machines. These tension pulleys can be used for comparable applications in other fields of machine and equipment engineering too. For further information on the various types see the following pages in this almanac: Type Page Used in SR 45 chapter 2 page 12 OErotor spinning frames CK 11 chapter 2 page 12 OErotor spinning frames CK 668 chapter 7 page 4 Filament processing SR 23 chapter 2 pages General mechanical engineering FR 232 chapter 2 page 14 General mechanical engineering SR 5047 chapter 2 page 10 Spindle drives Texturizing processes are applied to give synthetic filaments specific properties and one of them the false twisting method is used to produce such varieties as high or lowelasticity yarns, bulked yarns, or lowtwisted torque yarns. Texparts supplies integrated bearing units for friction texturizing, and for counter rolls and support rolls. If required, these bearing units are fitted with drive elements such as wharves and toothed pulleys or made up into readytoinstall units. Apron rollers for apron units round off the product range of the bearing units for texturizing aggregates. The integrated design of these bearing units with close bearing clearing tolerances allows low bearing pitch circle diameters for low bearing friction moment to be combined with high shaft and bearing stiffnesses for lowvibration operation. For the counter rolls, the combination of ball and roller bearing ensures long service life plus compact dimensions. The following table shows how the various bearing models are used: Texparts bearing Bearing unit Page model series for FL 66 Friction texturizing aggreg. chapter 7 pages 2 3 FL 668, CK 668 Counter rolls chapter 7 pages 4 5 Friction texturizing unit with false twist bearing unit FL False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 816 Chapter 817
125 Separator rolls VR Polyamide and polyester filaments and similar synthetics are subjected to a drawing process on draw twisters or draw winders. The process may be either cold drawing or hot drawing and for both of these suitable separator rolls are supplied by Texparts. Design features: The separator rolls are designed as bearing outer rings with low weight and high hardness for reducing slip between the filament and the roll, particularly during machine operation, and for preventing damage to the working surface when laps form. The working surfaces of the separator rolls are hardchromeplated with a selective and orangeskinlike surface structure for ensuring optimum friction characteristics between the filament and the working surface. The ball bearings are designed for high speeds and have a dispersion lubrication system to obviate runningin characteristics with increased friction moment and persistent grease working resistance. The cylindrical inner shape of the outer ring and even distribution of the lubricant permit full use of the lubricant supply for the two ball bearing rows and hence a long service life. A flexurally stiff axle assures very quiet running. A complete list of the Texparts's available range of VR separator rolls can be found on chapter 7, pages See chapter 8, page 8 for information on lubrication. Separator roll VR Chapter 818
126 Recommendations and practical informations 9 Recommendations for optimized spinning with Texparts spindles and Texparts draft equipment Chapter 91
127 Texparts spindle bearing units for spinning and twisting spindles Texparts supplies suitable spindle bearing units for a wide range of applications of modern spinning and twisting machines. These machines are equipped with Texparts HF/HZ and BIFLEX spindle bearing units known all over the world and proved under industrial conditions. Additionally, they are equipped with the highperformance spindle bearing units, CS1series for cotton and worsted ring frames, which meet all requirements for modern spindles due to an innovative, functionorientated new bearing principle. Advantages of Texparts spindle bearing units Outstanding running properties All Texparts spindle bearing units are equipped with metalelastic spring elements thus giving radial resilience to the bearing places. So, the top part of the spindle can rotate together with the unbalanced bobbin around the common axis through the centre of gravity, thus minimising bearing forces and spindle vibrations. In addition, the spring elements ensure that the top part of the spindle is always returned to the initial position centred on the spinning ring after being moved. The damping system of the Texparts spindle bearing units showing no wear during operation is a further feature. It has metal strip spirals filled with oil and in some cases grease gap dampers which are optimised for specific applications and which effectively suppress spindle vibrations over the whole speed range. The carefully matched spring and damping qualities of Texparts spindle bearings guarantee outstanding running properties in the spindles. Top spindle speeds Texparts offers two bearing principles for spinning and twisting spindles: Singleelastic spindle bearings In these bearing units, either the footstep bearing is kept radially movable by a metal spring (type Texparts CS1, HF, HZ). Damping in the form of an oilfilled metal spiral forms an integral property of the spring system. The singleelastic bearings are of robust design and set the standard for the majority of applications in spinning and twisting. They can be used in conjunction with highquality upper parts and tubes as well as for highspeed applications. Doubleelastic spindle bearings These bearings are additionally equipped with a second metal spring which affords radial resilience in the neck roller bearing (type Texparts CS1 S and SMM BIFLEX). This second spring also has a damping function being free of wear (oil/grease damper). The doubleelastic spindle bearing units allow the spindle upper part to shift the centre of the gravity axis even more exactly towards the rotation axis, thus achieving a major reduction in bearing forces and noise level. The doubleelastic spindle bearing units therefore are the ideal choice mainly for the high and maximum speed range. Their mechanical design permits speeds far above the limit imposed by the ring/traveller system. Quiet running behaviour The high precision of the Texparts spindle bearings and the systeminherent low bearing forces ensure lownoise spindle operation over the full speed range. A further advantage in this respect results from the doubleelastic spindle bearing systems, which generate lower acoustic pressure levels thanks to their lower bearing forces, and furthermore greatly reduce the transmission of structurerelated vibration to the machine. For this reason, the use of doubleelastic spindle bearing units is recommended whenever the noise level is a major criterion for the assessment of the machine. Minimised energy requirement The oillubricated neck bearing and footstep bearing of Texparts spindle bearings are precisely matched to the blade of the spindle upper part for good bearing performance, and ensure minimum bearing friction in all speed ranges. Furthermore, the low dynamic bearing forces mean that roller bearings and wharves can be made smaller, and in turn permit low belt speeds and tension roller speeds. This results in considerable energy saving of the machine. The model CS1 has specially been designed for highspeed cotton spinning spindles. The small head diameter allows an extremely small wharve diameter up to 18.5 mm connected with still more energy consumption. Chapter 92 Chapter 93
128 Applications for Texparts spindle bearing units High centring precision The centring of the spindle inside the ring is a crucial factor for minimising breakage rates and maximising cop filling. Here Texparts spindle bearing units offer ideal conditions: the spring elements of the spindle bearing counteract every movement of the spindle upper part with sufficiently high resetting forces to restore it quickly to its initial centred position; the flange underside and the centring collar of the spindle bearings are made with high precision and fully aligned with the axis of the upper part. Longlife Minimised bearing forces plus high manufacture precision of the Texparts spindle bearing units are the basis for longlife. The robustly designed elements of the spindle bearings also ensure the bearings to withstand occurring stresses such as during deceleration and doffing. Damping oil inside the spindle bearing serves for permanent lubrication with extremely long maintenance intervals. Spindle bearing types: CS1 Used in light cotton and worsted spindles with tube lengths of up to 260 mm and speeds of up to rpm. CS1 12 Used in cotton and worsted spindles for the manufacture of coarse yarns (e.g. denim yarns) as well as for spinning with suppressed yarn balloon and for spinning with big tube sizes up to 280 mm length. CS1 S Used in light cotton spindles with maximum speeds of up to rpm, or for light spindles subject to special noise requirements. HF 3 Used in light cotton and worsted spindles with large cop size, and in mediumsized twisting spindles, for tube lengths of up to 340 mm and speeds of up to rpm. HF 44, HZ 440, HZ 55, HZ 66, HZ 68, HZ 77 Used in spinning and twisting spindles exposed to high stresses, corresponding to the following guideline values: Axial loads up to 3.5 dan, tube lengths up to 360 mm for HF 44, HZ 440 Axial loads up to 5 dan, tube lengths up to 450 mm for HZ 55 Axial loads up to 7 dan, tube lengths up to 500 mm for HZ 66 Axial loads up to 13 dan, tube lengths up to 500 mm for HZ 68 Axial loads up to 13 dan, tube lengths up to 600 mm for HZ 77 BIFLEX SMM32/42 Used for highspeed applications, such as for draw twisting machines (load data on request). The applications given above are rough guideline values. When selecting the right spindle bearing model, the Texparts technical specifications must be taken as the basis. Chapter 94 Chapter 95
129 Tubes and bobbins The servicelife of spinning and twisting spindles is mainly affected by unbalances of the rotating spindle elements (upper part and tube) or of the bobbin yarn package. Major unbalances cause high reaction forces in the spindle bearings. These forces increase disproportionately with raised spindle speed with unexpected wear of the bearings and spindle failure in particular unfavourable conditions. Such major unbalances, moreover, lead to spindle vibrations with detrimental effects on yarn quality and ends down rates, thus raising energy consumption and noise emission. Today spindle upper parts generally are produced at best quality, i.e. with extremely low outoftrue properties and suitable resistance to deformation whereas in many cases only less attention is given to the quality of tubes and bobbins. So for example tubes often show too much clearance or inaccuracies in shape or they are made of poor material respectively. For these reasons and because of the applied top speed ranges high tube quality is a basic requirement. The following aspects should be taken into account here: Tube clearance The clearance between tube and spindle upper part has to be kept as small as possible. It, however, has to be reminded to the fact that the tube can easily be fitted and removed again and that contraction through yarn winding does not cause the tube to stick to the upper spindle part. The following technical measures have proved to be successful: reduction of the tube/bobbin tolerances by improved manufacturing methods and use of highquality materials. partial recesses in the upper part or in the tube/bobbin to provide more tolerance against deformation and contraction. use of dimensionally stable materials or metal fittings to avoid changes in tube diameter resulting from continued tube handling. Tube stiffness Especially in the highspeed range tubes can be bent by dynamic forces connected with an increase in unbalances acting on the spindles. This is mainly true when the tube is supported over its full length by the upper part, or if the tube projects above the spindle blade at its upper end. For this case it is strongly recommended to use dimensionally stable tubes made of highstrength materials. Wear on tubes and bobbin seats At yarn breakage very often the spindle upper parts are not stopped by brakes but rather manually. The coupling buttons run into the tube material: the tubes run inadequately and the remaining inner contour of the tube and the spindle blade are then subject to wear. As it is generally well known this makes the replacement of the tube and of the whole spindle respectively necessary within a short time. This problem can be minimised by using lowwear materials for tubes and bobbins or embedding lowwear rings; it, however, is best to correctly use the brakes. For tubes and bobbins it is advised to use ring inserts resistant to wear driven by friction cones as this is the case with the socalled bareblade spindles. The reflections about tube quality presented above have been kept quite general. They are, however, suitable to demonstrate the importance of tube/bobbin quality and interrelated factors. Practical ideas which generally have to make allowance to commercial considerations, too, must be matched to the respective application. Corresponding proposals are made by machine manufacturers and authorised spindle producers. Tube curvature and wall thickness differences It s a fact that tubes/bobbins with curvatures or large differences in wall thickness increase unbalance. Here, too, the attempt should be made to reduce the tolerances by means of highquality manufacturing as well as the use of highquality materials. A suitable tolerance recommendation for tapered tubes has been adopted in ISO 368 standard. Chapter 96 Chapter 97
130 The functions of ring and traveller 1) Ring and traveller are the main elements during ring spinning and twisting. They determine to a large extent the performance and the operating conditions of the machine. The ring traveller accomplishes two main tasks while running on the ring at high speeds: 1. It provides the fibre band or the double thread supplied by the feed rollers with the necessary torsion 2. It assists in winding the yarn onto the bobbin in the form of a cop with the "correct" tension. During this operation the ring guides the traveller which is essential for the perfect positioning of the yarn and the formation of the cop. The traveller is pressed against the ring track by centrifugal forces. The resulting frictional forces reduce the speed of the traveller, which is dragged along by the passingthrough yarn, and provide the yarn with the tensile forces necessary for assembling the individual fibres into the spun yarn as well as for limiting the yarn balloon. Steel travellers are hardened to a certain degree and polished to a mirror finish. They can be adapted in shape, weight and surface finish to the ring, the yarn type and the yarn count. Nylon travellers of the standard quality (for HZ and J rings) are made of highly wearresistant polyamide. Extremely aggressive yarns are processed with glassfibre reinforced SuperNylon travellers or NylonSteel travellers with steel insert. The operations of twisting and winding carried out by the traveller must be performed without undue tension of the yarn. The ratio of the spindle speed to the speed at which the yarn is supplied determines the torsion of the yarn. Any variation in this ratio is easily compensated for by the traveller without influence on its twisting, winding and tensioning operations. On flange rings, the sliding speed of suitable highperformance traveller shapes may be as high as 40 m/s (144 km/h), on SPECIAL coated rings even 45 m/s (162 km/h). Taking as basis a 3shiftoperation, i.e. 24 hours a day, a traveller running at 40 m/s covers a day trip of 3500 km or km in 10 days. This is in fact a fantastic job, if you consider that rings and travellers are two metal parts functioning just with the help of fibre lubrication. Prerequisites are, however, perfectly adopted rings and travellers as far as matching shapes and traveller cross sections are concerned and also an optimum material choice of the friction partners rings and travellers for making sure that the film of lubricating fibres will always be sufficient and that no yarn damage will occur. On oillubicated conical J rings, steel travellers may reach speeds of up to 35 m/s (126 km/h). The travellers operating at such high speeds do often sustain loads per surface unit of more than 35 N/mm². Even if highquality materials are used and if hardness and wear resistance are the best ones imaginable, these values will only be attainable with a constant and ever sufficient, uniform supply of lubricant to the traveller contact area. Prerequisites for Good Operating Results The maximum ability of rings and travellers to withstand strain is the limit to the performance of ring spinning and twisting machines. Intensive research and the latest knowledge about the choice of material and surface finish for rings and travellers and their design paved the way for a considerable increase in their ability to withstand strain. It is known that the traveller wear does not only depend on the material chosen but that quite complicated problems of heat dissipation play a part. The heat that generates between ring and traveller must be dissipated so rapidly that a local temperature increase of the traveller wear zones is avoided. The ability of the traveller to endure strain is influenced by quite a number of factors. Investigations regarding improvements of rings and travellers aimed at a further increase in performance should above all make sure that all other conditions that are not directly connected with rings and travellers but have nevertheless a great influence on the spinning process are unobjectionable. Therefore make sure that: the rings are perfectly centered with regard to the spindles; the yarnguide eyelet is well centered with regard to the spindle; the balloon control rings are perfectly centered with regard to the spindles; the spindle bearing is in good condition excluding spindle vibrations; the ratio between bobbin diameter, bobbin length and spindle gauge with regard to the ring diameter is correct; balloon control rings exist, their diameter matching the ring; appropriate, correctly adjusted traveller cleaners keep the flange traveller free from fibre fly; the room climate (temperature and relative air humidity) is favourable for the yarn processed; the air in the mill is free from dust and fibre fly that influence the efficient performance of the traveller negatively. At any rate is a smooth and well runin ring track a prerequisite. On oillubricated vertical HZ rings, this value may even be surpassed by nylon travellers under favourable operating conditions. 1) With kind permission of Messrs. Reiners + Fürst GmbH und Co. KG, Mönchengladbach. Chapter 98 Chapter 99
131 1. Concentricity of the ring, balloon control ring and yarnguide eyelet with regard to the spindle In order to achieve good yarn qualities and low end breakage rates an exactly concentric and horizontal adjustment of the ring, the balloon control ring and the yarnguide eyelet with regard to the spindle is required. This prevents onesided ring wear, in particular if high spindle speeds are run. Also the ring rails or ring holders should therefore be installed in absolutely horizontal position compared to the vertically set up spindles. d:d : H : If the value d:d is too small, a high traveller strain occurs. Traveller wear and end breakages will increase. If the value d:d is too large, it will result in disturbances of the yarn balloon. The balloon may collapse temporarily, resulting in increased hairiness and end breakages. If a too long bobbin or spindle is chosen (e.g. H = 5.5 x D), the yarn balloon will contact the tip of the bobbin. Besides increased end breakages a worse yarn quality will be registered. 2. Ratio of ring diameter, bobbin diameter and length and spindle gauge D and t : When choosing the ring Ø (D) the spindle gauge (t) has to be taken into consideration. D t d H α d D Ring Ø (D) up to 85 mm The ring diameter can be 25 mm smaller at a maximum with regard to the spindle gauge. Ring Ø (D) from 90 mm The ring diameter can be chosen 30 mm smaller at a maximum with regard to the spindle gauge. H BE EB EF < = Symbols: t = spindle gauge D = inside ring Ø d 1 d = mean bobbin Ø do = top bobbin Ø H = bobbin length BE = balloon control ring EB = setting distance ring/balloon control ring FB = yarn balloon RB = ring rail EF = setting distance top of bobbin/ yarnguide eyelet (measures in mm) Recommended ratio values: D = t 25 mm d:d in spinning: or a (not less than 0.42 or a 26 ) d:d in twisting: or a ) (not less than 0.38 or a 22 ) 5 x D ~ D + 2 mm ~ 2 x D ~ 2 x do EB EF do BE d D FB RB H BE : Only then traveller and yarn balloon will have the necessary freedom of movement. Inserting the traveller, repairing end breakages and exchanging the cop can in this case be done with fewer obstacles. The balloon control ring should be 2 3 mm larger than the ring diameter. If the balloon control ring is too big, it will not fulfil its job of releasing the yarn balloon. Chapter 910 Chapter 911
132 3. Balloon control rings, separators, yarnguide eyelets The influence of balloon control rings is quite considerable, especially if long cops are involved. A reduction of the yarn balloon is advantageous or may even be the prerequisite for highest spindle speeds in order to reduce the traveller strain. Balloon control rings should be in concentric position and without damage. If balloon control rings are mounted in the correct distance of height, (the balloon should be restricted as long as possible during one lift of the ring rail), a marked performance increase can be achieved. If very delicate fibre materials are processed (e.g. certain synthetic fibres or core yarns) which require the balloon control rings to be removed, separators are required. Sufficiently long separators, which are generally installed additionally besides balloon control rings, help to avoid series of yarn breaks. Furthermore they prevent to a great extent fibre fly from depositing on neigh bouring spindles, especially in the case of end breakages. Yarnguide eyelets should be wearresistant and have the optimum diameter. They have to be mounted with the correct distance in height in order to guarantee the proper transmission of the yarn twist. Damaged yarnguide eyelets have to be replaced in time. 4. Traveller cleaners Traveller cleaners are an excellent means to remove all fibre fly that deposits on the outer part of travellers on flange rings. The traveller cleaner should have the right distance to the outside ring flange. If it is not perfectly adjusted, fibre fly will deposit at the outer traveller bow. This results in an increased traveller weight and air resistance so that yarn tension and end breakages increase. 5. Room climate A constant temperature and air humidity will have positive effects on the operation of the traveller. Variations in the atmospheric conditions within the room like higher air humidity will increase the friction wear and the lap formation through static charge. Besides the regular exchange of air the cleanliness of the air is of great importance for the traveller. Any dust (also dust coming from unsuitable floors) or other impurities may impair the operation of the traveller and produce more ring and traveller wear. The air humidity distributed bythe air conditioning must be free from alkaline components, because these may deposit on the ring and then disturb the traveller operation. 6. Choice of the «correct» flange width and ring height The best operating results are obtained when the ideal flange width is chosen for flange rings and the ideal ring height is obtained for selflubricating HZ and J rings, dependent upon the yarn count range, the yarn quality and the traveller type. 7. Ring profile and traveller shape Determining the most favourable ring and traveller shape as well as surface treatment is a prerequisite for obtaining the best possible individual perform ance. If ring profile and traveller shape match well, the traveller will adopt a stable position in the ring. It should have sufficient freedom of movement, so that any obstacles, which may occur especially when the machine is started, are avoided. A sufficiently large yarn clearance prevents yarn breaks and yarn damage. On flange rings the contact between ring and traveller should only be as shown in Fig. 1. Any further contact between ring and traveller e.g. with its foot at the inner or outer ring web (Fig. 2) would impede the operation of the traveller. The consequences are more yarn breaks and a higher ring and traveller wear. Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 On HZ and J rings the contact should only be as illustrated in Fig. 3. Any further contact of the traveller at the upper or lower ring rail or ring holder (Fig. 4) would impede the operation of the traveller. The rings should have a perfect fit in the ring rail or ring holder. Incorrectly fastened rings may turn in the bore or be lifted out. The travellers will then strike against the bottom part of the ring rail or ring holder. In doing so, they may pinch off the lubricating wick and interrupt the flow of oil. 8. Correct surface smoothness, i.e. optimum peaktovalley height and evenness of the ring track The traveller contact surface must be smooth and even. Only then will a smooth operation of the traveller be possible. The contacted surfaces should be clean and preferably without traces of wear. In addition they should be designed in a way to offer a sufficient adherence for the lubricants coming into question (fibre or oil lubrication). Once the sliding surfaces have lost their original quality, the best ring traveller will not be able to run smoothly. For maintaining the surface of the running track in a good condition it is very important besides a certain degree of maintenance to run the ring well in. 9. Steady formation of a lubricating film Flange rings must not be lubricated with oil or grease. Instead, a continuous film of lubricating fibres should form on the running track. HZ and J rings should be provided with a lubricating system, which suits the yarn count range, the yarn quality, the traveller style and the operating speed. The lubricant should be supplied to and given off from the ring con tinuously and in even amounts. Rings of steel should have wicks and felts in good condition. Damaged or dirtcrusted wicks and felts prevent an even spreading of the lubricant on the ring track. They should therefore be replaced in time. Chapter 912 Chapter 913
133 In the case of sintered steel rings the lubricating holes (pores), which are interconnected and go through the entire ring, should not be clogged at the sliding surfaces which give off oil. If the rings are relubricated at regular intervals with a special oil of optimum viscosity, high speeds are possible and rings and travellers may obtain long service lives. Any change in lubrication will cause a variation of the frictional values and consequently of the yarn tension. Spindle drive in ring frames The following types of drive system are commonly used for spindles in ring frames: 10. RunningIn the rings In many cases the runningin procedure is decisive for the future positive or negative behaviour of the ring and the length of its working time. Every ring requires a certain amount of runningin, if it is to maintain high traveller speeds with as little ring and traveller wear as possible. Runningin should therefore always be done by the recommendations specified for each ring type. During runningin the use of steel travellers without surface treatment is recommended. After the termination of the runningin process, steel travellers with surface treatment or nylon as well as bronze travellers can be used. 11. Traveller numbers and traveller wear The traveller weight (number) should conform to the yarn thickness. Other important factors are spindle speed, delivery speed, balloon size and cop hardness. The influence of the balloon form on the operational behaviour and in particular on the rate of yarn breaks may be quite considerable. The yarn balloon should only have slight contact with the balloon control ring. A too loose or too taut yarn balloon (if the traveller is too light or too heavy) must be avoided. These balloon forms will bring about more yarn breaks, increased traveller wear and an inferior yarn quality. The extent of traveller wear is fundamentally influenced by the quality of the fibres processed, the traveller speed and the ring condition. Heavy traveller wear will lead to increased ring straining, variations in winding and balloon tension and a smaller yarn clearance of the traveller. HZ and J travellers may change their operating position and strike against the ring holder, the ring rail and the fastening elements. Regular traveller changes made in time will contribute to an even yarn quality and a longer ring service life. Regular changing intervals are therefore recommended. Attention! The recommendations given above must be respected even more strictly for the ring spinning frames of the new generation, e.g. operating at spindle speeds of up to rpm. Discrepancies in diameter coordination, centering, vibrationdamping, traveller cleaner position etc, and especially in observing the ring/traveller recommendations, can result in significantly poorer running conditions and considerably increasing wear of ring and traveller. Tangential belt drive Sectional drive All these spindle drive types require either tapes or belts for power transmission from motor to spindle. With all of these drive systems, it is necessary to press the tape or belt with sufficient force against the spindle wharve. Deviations of the spindle out of its central position in relation to the spinning ring should be avoided here. The spindles must on the one hand reliably achieve the required spindle speed with as little slip as possible, not displaying any notable speed differences between the spinning points of a machine; and on the other hand, there is the technological requirement to accelerate the spindles up to their rated speed in the shortest possible time after repairing yarn breaks. Texparts supplies contact pressure assemblies of the finest design and quality, as are needed for all tape and belt drive types. Tangential and sectional drive Tension pulleys SR (see chapter 2, page 10) SR 28 tension pulleys with flanges arranged at top or bottom are used in the tangential belt drive with 2 independent tangential belts for the lefthand and righthand ring frame sides respectively for guiding the belt return movement. Contact roll assemblies AR (see chapter 2, page 27) There are a number of different standard series available depending on application: AR 5047 with 50 mm shell diameter for belts up to 40 mm width AR 5024 with 50 mm shell diameter for belts up to 16 mm width AR 3528 with 35 mm shell diameter for belts up to 20 mm width The contact roll assembly AR 5047 is used in ring frames with singlebelt or doublebelt tangential drive. Its design allows universal interchangeability with the previous standard variants AR 28, AR 45, AR 13/15. The shell diameter of 50 mm permits lower AR speeds, which in turn has a positive effect on service life, noise emission, relubrication intervals and the necessary energy requirement. For dependable belt guidance, the AR 5047 is fitted with two flanges. Chapter 914 Chapter 915
134 The contact roll assembly AR 5024 is used in ring frames with sectional drive. It is also universally interchangeable with the previous AR For ring frames with sectional drive, there are also versions available with only one pulley (arranged left or right of holding angle). The contact roll assembly AR 3528 is used in ring frames with multimotor single tangential belt drives. All AR variants comprise two contact roll pulleys mounted on a spring bracket in the holding angle of the spindle rail. The defined sag of the leaf spring of the spring bracket determines the contact pressure of the contact roll pulleys against the belt. The pulley spacing is double that of the spindles. Sectional drive Tangential belt drive 1beltarrangement Tangential belt drive 2beltarrangement Chapter 916 Chapter 917
135 Series PK 3000 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines pneumatic load principle The weighting arms of the PK 3000 series with pneumatic loading of top rollers are designed for use in 3roller double apron draft arrangements for spinning cotton, manmade fibres or blends thereof. Various sizes of top apron cradles (OH) are available to suit the different categories of fibre length. The size of the cradle used determines the front zone setting. The different types of top apron cradles OH, draft field settings and maximum fibre length will be found in chapter 5, page PK PK ) Fig. A: Draft arrangements for PK 3000 series Draft sizes Total draft The amount of total draft to be applied mainly depends on the type and composition of the fibre material and quality of the roving. With weighting arm PK 3000 the normal total draft range for roving frame roving is, in practice, as much as 50 (see fig. B, Total drafts). The choice of draft range depends on the desired yarn qualities and operating conditions of the frame (ends down behaviour). Inhouse spinning trials should be carried out to determine the optimum draft range. Fig. B (Total drafts) shows common draft ranges determined according to the respective fibre materials. Rear draft The purpose of rear zone draft is to slightly tension the roving and feed the fibre material to the main draft zone in a wellstretched condition. The usual rear draft for PK 3000 equipment ranges between 1.15 to ) In the case of PK 3035 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than the one of the PK 3025 (middle guide element for PK 3035: Ref. No ) Weighting arm PK Bracket 8 Opening for support rod Equipment (not 2 Arm 9 Cover cap with integrated included in scope 3 Handle clearer roller holder of delivery) 4 Clamp 10 Front weighting element 14 Rear top roller 5 Fixing screw of 11 Middle weighting element 15 Apron top roller weighting arm 12 Rear weighting element 16 Top apron 6 Height setting eccentric 13 Fixing screw of weighting 17 Top apron cradle 7 Air flow indicator elements 18 Front top roller Chapter 918 Chapter 919
136 Draft ranges for PK 3000 Rear drafts Total drafts Extremely short carded cotton Carded cotton Combed cotton Blends of cotton and manmade fibres Pure manmade fibres Fig B: Total drafts When determining the optimum rear zone draft care should be taken for controlled draft of the roving in the rear zone. Hardtwisted roving needs a higher rear zone draft whereas a too strong loosening effect on the roving indicates the necessity for reducing the rear draft. Values of the rear zone settings depend on the fibre to be spun, fibre length and roving twist. A total draft zone width, expanding from 82 mm to 155 mm, in comparison to PK 2000 series, permits additional and previously unfeasible draft system variants. Weighting arms, zone settings and maximum fibre length Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter Draft field mm Total PK PK OH 2022 I II III HF VF min VF usual 1) draft field GF mm max. Fibre length max. mm ) OH /27 25/27 25/ ) OH ) OH ) OH /30 25/27 27/ ) OH ) Table A: Summary of different weighting arm types for cotton draft systems 1) Depends on the fibre to be spun, fibre length and roving twist. Draft field settings Front zone setting The front zone setting depends on the type of top apron cradle. In Tab. A, page 921 (Summary of different weighting arm types for cotton draft systems), the distance HF (front zone = centre of bottom apron roller/centre of front bottom roller) is shown for the respective bottom roller diameters (I, II). Differences between bottom roller diameters and the values given in the table must be taken into consideration when the front zone is determined. The fronthang of the front top roller 1 in relation to the front bottom roller is 2 mm (System dimension: support rod/ front bottom roller = 204 mm). Apron top roller 2 has a backhang of 2 mm in relation to the axis of the bottom roller II (fig. C). Basically, when adjusting the front zone setting you should make sure that the operation of the individual draft elements doesn't get impaired (e.g. when front zone condensers are used). PK Fig. D: Zone settings for PK3000 series weighting arms PK Rear zone setting The rear zone setting depends on the type of fibre to be spun, fibre length and also on the roving twist. Larger rear zone settings should be selected if the material to be processed is difficult to be drafted. This may be the case with hardtwisted roving or manmade fibres with strong interfibre bonding. Inhouse trials should be carried out to find out the optimum rear zone setting. Fig. C: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller Chapter 920 Chapter 921
137 Roller loading Types, Ref. No. PK , PK Load on top roller [dan] Front 1 Middle 2 Rear bar bar Operating pressure [bar] Standard application range bar Extended application range* The roller loads on rear, apron and front top rollers (see fig. E) are interlinked at a fixed ratio. This ratio is determined by the pressure plate size of the weighting elements. When the working pressure is changed, this ratio remains constant. The correlation between the set working pressure and the saddle load of all top rollers in the weighting arm is shown as a graph in fig. G. In most applications (e.g. if cotton fibres are processed), a working pressure between 1.7 to 2.0 is sufficient to reach good spinning conditions. In the case of manmade fibre materials or blends, a working pressure between 2.2 to 2.5 bar can be of advantage. There is no risk of incorrect setting of the individual weighting arm because of the centralised and simple pressure setting. Weighting arm Ring main Tscrewing Lquickconnector Pneumatic Unit 1.5 to 3.0 bar (4.0 bar, over limit) Fig. E: Roller loading PK 3000 series Pneu matic unit Fig. F: Air supply system for PK 3000 series Partial load End piece The weighting pressure in the PK 3000 is generated pneumatically by a closedcircuit compressed air system (fig. F). The air supply to the draft system in the PK 3000 is completely integrated into the support rod. The weighting pressure onto the top rollers can be set infinitely and centrally through the air pressure and thus, an optimum adjustment to the fibre material is possible. Due to the pneumatic spring in the weighting arm the operating pressure is being transformed into the saddle load directly via the pressure plates of the individual weighting elements. Pressure setting and system monitoring are performed centrally at the pneumatic unit installed at the headstock of the ring spinning machine. The weighting arms PK 3000 offer the possibility of practical and reliable central partial load in order to prevent moiré effect. This is applied to the top rollers thanks to the inherent elasticity of the pneumatic spring. It automatically takes effect after a certain period of time when the ring spinning machine is turned off by the main switch The partial load prevents intrusion of the yarn twist into the draft field, and even soft top roller cots are protected from permanent deformation (no moiré effect!). After the switch off of the ring spinning machine, the partial load develops automatically. *) The possibility to utilize the "extended application range" has to be discussed with the OEM. Chapter 922 Chapter 923
138 The top apron cradles OH 2022/OH 2042 offer the following advantages: 30 Standard application range front and rear top roller apron top roller Extended *) application range Aprons can be exchanged without the apron unit being dismantled, i.e. with the OH aggregate still in place. Individual apron tensioning by means of movable apron guide places, less strain on the fibres and gentle guidance during the draft process. Lowfriction apron running ensures low drive torques and long apron working time. saddle load [dan] The following table shows the top apron cradles for Texparts weighting arms PK 3000 together with the associated top aprons, the apron inner diameter and the recommended standard range of distance clips. Top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 3000series: Top apron Gauge Top aprons Basic equipment Colour cradles OH Tw general Distance clips 1) Ref. No. [mm] designation Ref. No. OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OLC OLC OLC yellow lilac white 0 0 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 working pressure [bar] *) The possibility to utilize the "extended application range" has to be discussed with the OEM. Fig. G: Correlation between saddle load and working pressure for PK 3000 series Top apron cradles and top aprons OH PR 2813 OH PR 2813 OH ) 68.4 PR 028 OH ) 75 PR 032 OH ) 82.5 PR 032 OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC red yellow white yellow white grey Fig. H: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 3000 weighting arms Depending on the application, the weighting arms of the PK 3000 Series can be fitted with different top apron cradles: a) Short staple top apron cradles OH 2022 for cotton and manmade fibres up to 45 mm length, and for blends thereof b) Medium staple top apron cradles OH 2042 for cotton fibres over 40 mm length, manmade fibres and blends thereof up to cut lengths of 54 mm. c) Long staple top apron cradles OH 1225 for manmade fibres of cut lengths up to approx. 60 mm. 1) One clip per cradle is required for each type of OH. Clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. 2) Available on request. Chapter 924 Chapter 925
139 Opening X at apron release point The vertical distance between the front edge of the top apron cradle, the type of aprons (top and bottom) and the bottom apron nose bar determine the intensity with which the fibre material is controlled and guided between top and bottom aprons (Fig. I). To achieve optimum draft conditions, the opening X can be adjusted using distance clips. Figs. J/K show which distance clips are to be used to provide the respective opening X for the various top apron cradles. As a basic rule of thumb: the smaller Fig. I: Opening X the opening, the more even the yarn. The selection of the opening X also depends on the following parameters: type of fibre material type of top apron cradle fibre mass in the main draft zone type of apron and dimensions roving and yarn count type of bottom apron nose bar and its position. Extremely narrow openings result in good yarn qualities, though frame operating conditions (ends down, undrafted portions etc.) may, under certain circumstances, be influenced negatively. The ideal opening for the fibre material to be processed should be determined by mill trials. The following information (see figs. K1 to K3) is intended as a guide for the choice of distance clips for various yarn counts. OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2022 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey black * 2.5* 2.8* Fig. K1: Recommended distance clips for Texparts top apron cradle OH 2022 subject to yarn counts Opening X Distance clip OLC Top apron cradle Colour Ref.No. OH 2022 OH 2042 OH 1225 (short) (medium) (long) red * 2.6 chrome yellow yellow * 2.8* 3.4* lilac * white * 3.5* 3.7* light green grey * turquoise black orange beige green Fig. J: OLC distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradles (The figures in the column give the values for the opening X in mm.) * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2042 Opening "x" in mm yellow lilac white light green * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. Chapter 926 Chapter 927 Ne Nm >40 >68 grey turquoise turquoise black 2.4* * 3.2* 3.5* Fig. K2: Recommended distance clips for Texparts top apron cradle OH 2042 subject to yarn counts
140 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 1225 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green Top rollers for PK 3000 weighting arms are supplied as top rollers without cots as standard. If desired, Texparts will also supply top rollers with readyground cots. The cot quality can be determined by the customer. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm or increase the loading via increasing the air pressure. Regarding cot quality, rear and front top rollers are mutually interchangeable. The choice of cot mainly depends on the type of fibre material to be processed and its running properties. Accotex cots having a hardness between 60 and 83 Shore A are used for rear and front top rollers today. In the case of soft cots, it is advisable to apply the partial load on all top rollers, if the frame is idle for longer periods. This will prevent moiré effects caused by fluting.texparts supplies the apron top roller LP 1003 with plastic sleeves as standard. If requested, the apron top roller LP 1002 with cots can also be supplied. Accotex cots with a hardness of 80 Shore A are suitable for this apron top roller. The dimensions of the bottom aprons depend on the design of the substructure of the draft system. Two types of substructure are most common in practice: 1. Long bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided and prestressed by a tensioning link. 2. Short bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided by specially designed bottom apron nose bars. grey turquoise black 2.6* * 3.4* 3.7* Fig. K3: Recommended distance clips for Texparts top apron cradle OH 1225 subject to yarn counts * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. Top roller cots Bottom aprons Series PK 2100 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines Various types of weighting arms are available for cotton ring spinning machine draft. The arms of the PK 2100series are designed for use in 3roller double apron draft arrangements for spinning cotton, manmade fibres and blends thereof. Various sizes of top apron cradle OH are available to suit the different categories of fibre length. The size of the respective cradle used determines the front zone setting. The different types of top apron cradles OH, draft field settings and maximum fibre length will be found in chapter 5, page 613. Weighting arm PK 2100 series Ref. No. PK PK PK PK PK 2130 PK ) Fig. A: Draft arrangements PK 2130 and PK 2135 Types PK 2135 and PK 2165 weighting arms are mainly used for spinning longer staple fibres. They are designed for this purpose using rear and front top rollers with a diameter of 35 mm. For spinning particularly fine yarns, materials that are difficult to draft and for spinning with high total drafts, we recommend the weighting arms PK 2155 and PK ) In the case of PK 2135 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than the one of the Chapter 928 Chapter 929 PK 2130
141 Draft ranges for PK 2130 and PK 2135 Rear drafts Total drafts Extremely short carded cotton 2035 Carded cotton 2040 Combed cotton 2545 Blends of cotton and manmade fibres 2550 Pure manmade fibres Draft ranges for PK 2155 and PK 2165 PK 2155 PK ) Fig.B: Draft arrangements PK 2155 and PK 2165 Draft sizes Total draft The amount of total draft to be applied mainly depends on the type and composition of the fibre material and the quality of the roving. With weighting arms types PK 2130 and PK 2135 the normal total draft range for speedframe roving is, in practice, as much as 50 (see fig. C, Total drafts on the following page). The choice of draft range depends on the desired yarn qualities and the operating conditions of the frame (ends down behaviour) Inhouse spinning trials should be carried out to determine the optimum draft range. Fig. C (Total drafts) shows common draft ranges arranged according to different fibre materials. Rear draft The purpose of rear zone draft is to slightly tension the roving and to feed fibre material to the main draft zone in a wellstretched state. The usual rear draft for PK 2130 and PK 2135 equipment ranges between 1.15 and 1.3. In special cases, rear drafts greater than 1.3 are possible with PK 2155 and PK Rear drafts Total drafts up to 50 Cotton Manmade fibres over 70 Blends Fig. C: Total drafts In determining the optimum rear zone draft care should be taken for a controlled draft of the roving in the rear zone. A hardtwisted roving needs a higher rear zone draft whereas a too strong loosening effect on the roving indicates the necessity for reducing the rear draft. Standard values for the rear zone settings are given in table A (Summary of different weighting arm types) on page 932. Draft fields Front zone setting The front zone setting depends on the type of top apron cradle (see table A on page 932). The figures shown for front zone setting HF (front zone = centre of the bottom apron roller/front bottom roller) are based on the use of the diameters shown for these rollers in fig E, page 933. Differences between bottom roller diameters and the values given in table A must be taken into consideration when the front zone is determined. The fronthang of the front top roller I in relation to the front bottom roller is 2 mm. (System dimension: support rod/front bottom roller d= 203 mm). Apron top roller 2 has a backhang of 2 mm in relation to the axis of the bottom roller II (see fig. D). Basically, when adjusting the front zone setting, you should make sure that the operation of the individual draft elements doesn't get impaired (e.g. when front zone condensers are employed). 1) In the case of PK 2165 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than the one of the PK Fig. D: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller Chapter 930 Chapter 931
142 Weighting arms, zone settings and maximum fibre length Weighting arm PK PK PK PK Top apron cradle OH 62 Bottom roller diameter 1) Draft field mm Total draft I II III HF VF min VF usual* field GF mm max. Fibre length max. mm OH ) 45 OH /27 25/27 25/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /30 25/27 27/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /27 25/27 25/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /30 25/27 27/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 Table A: Summary of the different weighting arm types for cotton draft systems ) 1) 1) 1) PK 2130 PK 2135 PK 2155 PK 2165 Fig. E: Zone settings for PK 2100 series weighting arms Rear zone setting The rear zone setting depends on the type of fibre to be spun, length of fibre, and roving twist. Rear zone settings greater than those in the table A should be selected if the material to be processed is difficult to be drafted. This may be the case with hardtwisted rovings or manmade fibres with strong fibres / fibre bonding. Inhouse trials should be carried out to determine the optimum rear zone setting. 1) Depends on the fibre to be spun, fibre length and roving twist. Fig. F: Roving guidance in the rear zone for PK 2155 / PK 2165 Chapter 932 Chapter 933
143 Roller loading In the case of PK 2100 weighting arms 6 different loads can be set for the front top roller using the eccentric load selector on the front guide arm. The setting load is indicated by the respective colour marking on the eccentric load selector: The selectable loads on the middle and rear top rollers for the individual PK 2100 weighting arms are given in fig. G (Weighting arms PK 2100 and their roller loads). Thanks to the increased number of load pressure setting options the spinning process can be adjusted perfectly to suit even critical fibres. If the OH 2042 (OH medium) is used to process relatively long fibres or to spin fine yarn counts, the highest load (15 dan) should be used at the apron top roller. Weighting arm Front Apron Rear Ref. No. top roller top roller top roller [dan] [dan] [dan] PK (6) 1) , PK (6) 1) , PK (6) 1) , PK (6) 1) , ) Partial load Fig.G: Weighting arms PK 2100 and their roller loads. Setting the load on the front element The load on the front guide element can be set in 6 stages. Setting is effected by means of an eccentric load selector, activated by the setting wrench The appropriate load can be identified by the code colour on the eccentric load selector visible in the opening of the front guide arm. The following load stages can be selected on the front element of PK 2100 series weighting arms: Partial load white (no colour) Partial load Load 1 = 10 dan black Load 2 = 12 dan black/green PK 2100 weighting arms also allow partial load on front guide element. This becomes possible by setting the eccentric load selector to colour code "white" using setting wrench (Fig. I: Partial load). The partial load has a saddle load of 6 dan. Load 3 = 14 dan green Load 4 = 16 dan green/red Load 5 = 18 dan red Fig. H: Load stages on front guide element of PK 2100 series weighting arms Fig. I: Partial load at the front element of PK 2100 series weighting arms Load setting Colour code of eccentric load selector Load (dan) Partial load white (no colour) 6 Load 1 (Basic) black 10 Load 2 black/green 12 Load 3 (Standard) green 14 Load 4 green/red 16 Load 5 (Maximum) red 18 Chapter 934 Chapter 935
144 Setting the load on the rear and middle element Three different loads are possible for the middle and rear element of the weighting arms PK 2130, PK 2135 and for the middle element of the weighting arms PK 2155, PK The load on the rear and middle element can be set by turning the eccentric load selector by means of hexagon socket screwdriver (see fig. K). The load setting can be identified by the position of the eccentric load selector (see fig. K). Basic load I: Load indicator (blue triangle) in front position. Medium load II: Load indicator (blue triangle) in middle position. Maximum load III: Load indicator (blue triangle) in rear position. PK 2130/PK 2135 Load Basic load I Medium load II Maximum load III Middle element (dan) PK 2155/PK 2165 Load Basic load I Medium load II Maximum load III Rear element (dan) Middle Rear element (dan) element (dan) b) Medium top apron cradles OH 2042/OH 132 for cotton fibres over 40 mm length, manmade fibres and blends thereof up to cut lengths of 54 mm. c) Long top apron cradles OH 122 for manmade fibres of cut lengths up to approx. 60 mm. The construction principle of the OH 62/OH 132/OH 122 cradles allows apron tolerances to be compensated with regard to apron guidance and stretching. Top apron cradles OH 2022/OH 2042 offer further additional advantages: aprons can be exchanged without the apron unit being dismantled, i.e. with the OH aggregate still in place. individual apron tensioning by means of movable apron guide places, less strain on the fibres and gentle guidance during the draft process. lowfriction apron running ensures low drive torques and long apron servicetime. Top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 2100 Top apron Gauge Top aprons cradles OH Tw general Basic equipment Colour Ref. No. [mm] designation Dist. clips 1) Ref. No. OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OH PR 32 OH ) 68.4 PR 2813 OH ) 75 PR 2813 OH PR 323 OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC yellow lilac white red yellow white Fig. K: Load setting on the rear and middle element of the PK 2100 Top apron cradles and top aprons Basic Load I Medium Load II Maximum Load III Depending on the application, the weighting arms of PK 2100series can be fitted with different top apron cradles: OH PR 028 OH PR 032 OH PR 032 OLC OLC OLC yellow white grey Fig. L: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 2100 weighting arms 1) One clip per cradle is required for each type of OH. These clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. a) Short top apron cradles OH 2022/OH 62 for cotton and manmade fibres up to 45 mm length and blends thereof. 2) For use in weighting arms of PK 2100 series (high load setting (15 dan) at the middle element recommended). Chapter 936 Chapter 937
145 Opening X at apron release point The following information (see figs. O1 to O5) is intended as a guide for the choice of distance clips to be used for various yarn counts. The vertical distance between the front edges of the top apron cradle, the type of aprons and the bottom apron nose bar determine the intensity with which the fibre material is controlled and guided between top and bottom aprons (fig. M). To achieve optimum draft conditions, the opening X can be adjusted using distance clips. Figs. N/O show which distance clips are to be used to provide the respective opening X for the various top apron cradles. As a basic rule of thumb: the smaller the opening, the more even the yarn gets. Selection of the opening X also depends on the following parameters: type of fibre material fibre mass in the main draft zone roving and yarn count type of top apron cradle type of apron and dimensions type of bottom apron nose bar and buildin position. Taking these parameters into account, the selection of the opening X represents something of a compromise. Extremely narrow openings produce good yarn qualities, though frame operating conditions (ends down, undrafted portions etc.) may, under certain circumstances, be negatively be influenced. In any case the ideal opening for the fibre material to be processed should be determined by mill trials. Opening X Distance clip OLC Colour Ref.No. Top apron cradle OH 2022 (short) OH 62 (short) Fig. M: Opening X OH 2042 (medium) OH 132 (medium) OH 122 (long) red * 2.5* 2.6 chrome yellow yellow * 2.2* 2.8* 3.3* 3.4* lilac * 2.5* white * 2.9* 3.5* 3.6* 3.7* light green grey * turquoise black orange beige green Fig. N: OLC Distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradles (The figures in the column give the values for the opening X in mm.) * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2022 Opening "x" in mm yellow lilac white light green * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. Chapter 938 Chapter 939 Ne Nm >40 >68 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 62 Opening "x" in mm grey black * 2.5* 2.8* Fig. O1: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 2022 Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey turquoise turquoise black * 2.5* 2.9* Fig. O2: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 62
146 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2042 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey black 2.4* * 3.2* 3.5* Fig. O3: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 2042 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 1225 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. turquoise turquoise black 2.6* * * Fig. O5: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 1225 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 132 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey turquoise black 2.5* * * Fig. O4: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 132 Top roller cots Top rollers for PK 2100 weighting arms are supplied as top rollers LP 1002 without cots as standard. If desired, Texparts will also supply top rollers with readyground cots. The cot quality can be determined by the customer. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm. With reference to the cot quality, rear and front top rollers are mutually interchangeable. Determining the choice of cot mainly depends on the type of fibre material to be processed and its running properties. Accotex cots having a hardness between 60 and 83 Shore A are used for rear and front top rollers today. In the case of soft cots, it is advisable to apply a low loading weight on the front top roller if the frame is idle for longer periods. This will prevent moiréformation caused by fluting. The weighting arms of PK 2100series are equipped with partial load on the front element. The partial load has a saddle load of 6 dan. Texparts supplies the apron top roller LP 1003 with plastic sleeves as standard for apron top roller. If requested, LP 1002 with cots can also be supplied as apron top roller. Accotex cots with a hardness of 80 Shore A are suitable for this apron top roller. * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. Chapter 940 Chapter 941
147 Bottom aprons The dimensions of the bottom aprons depend on the design of the substructure of the draft system. In practice, two types of substructure are most common: 1. Long bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided and pretensioned by a tensioning link. 2. Short bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided by specially designed bottom apron nose bars, no tensioning link is provided. Series PK 2000 weighting arms for cotton ring spinning machines Various types of weighting arms are available for cotton ring spinning machine draft. The arms of the PK 2000series are designed for use in 3roller double apron draft arrangements for spinning cotton, manmade fibres and blends thereof. Various sizes of top apron cradle OH are available to suit the different categories of fibre length. The size of the respective cradle used determines the front zone setting. The different types of top apron cradles OH, draft field settings and maximum fibre length will be found in chapter 5, page Weighting arm PK 2000 series Ref. No. PK PK PK PK PK 2025 PK ) Fig. A: Draft arrangements PK 2025 and 2035 Types PK 2035 and PK 2065 weighting arms are mainly used for spinning of longer staple fibres. They are designed for this purpose using rear and front top rollers with a diameter of 35 mm. For spinning particularly fine yarns, materials that are difficult to draft and for spinning with high total drafts, we recommend the weighting arms PK 2055 and PK ) In the case of PK 2035 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than the one of the PK Chapter 942 Chapter 943
148 Draft ranges for PK 2025 and PK 2035 Rear drafts Total drafts Extremely short carded cotton 2035 Carded cotton 2040 Combed cotton 2545 Blends of cotton and manmade fibres 2550 Pure manmade fibres Draft ranges for PK 2055 and PK 2065 PK 2055 PK ) Fig.B: Draft arrangements PK 2055 and PK 2065 Draft sizes Total draft The amount of total draft to be applied mainly depends on the type and composition of the fibre material and the quality of the roving. With weighting arms, types PK 2025 and PK 2035, the normal total draft range for speedframe roving is, in practice, as much as 50 (see fig. C, Total drafts on the following page). The choice of draft range depends on the desired yarn qualities and the operating conditions of the frame (ends down behaviour) Inhouse spinning trials should be carried out to determine the optimum draft range. Fig. C (Total drafts) shows common draft ranges arranged according to different fibre materials. Rear draft The purpose of rear zone draft is to slightly tension the roving and to feed fibre material to the main draft zone in a wellstretched state. The usual rear draft for PK 2025 and PK 2035 equipment ranges between 1.15 and 1.3. In special cases, rear drafts greater than 1.3 are possible with PK 2055 and PK Rear drafts Total drafts up to 50 Cotton Manmade fibres over 70 Blends Fig. C: Total drafts In determining the optimum rear zone draft care should be taken for a controlled draft of the roving in the rear zone. A hardtwisted roving needs a higher rear zone draft whereas a too strong loosening effect on the roving indicates the necessity for reducing the rear draft. Standard values for the rear zone settings are given in table A (Summary of different weighting arm types) on next page. Draft fields Front zone setting The front zone setting depends on the type of top apron cradle (see table A on next page). The figures shown for front zone setting HF (front zone = centre of the bottom apron roller/front bottom roller) are based on the use of the diameters shown for these rollers in fig E, page 947. Differences between bottom roller diameters and the values given in table A must be taken into consideration when the front zone is determined. The fronthang of the front top roller I in relation to the front bottom roller is 2 mm. (System dimension: support rod/front bottom roller d= 203 mm). Apron top roller 2 has a backhang of 2mm in relation to the axis of the bottom roller II (see fig. D). Basically, when adjusting the front zone setting, you should make sure that the operation of the individual draft elements doesn't get impaired (e.g. when front zone condensers are employed). 1) In the case of PK 2065 the middle guide element is 3.5 mm longer than the one of the PK Fig. D: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller Chapter 944 Chapter 945
149 Weighting arms, zone settings and maximum fibre length Weighting arm PK PK PK PK Top apron cradle OH 62 Bottom roller diameter 1) Draft field mm Total draft I II III HF VF min VF usual* field GF mm max. Fibre length max. mm OH ) 45 OH /27 25/27 25/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /30 25/27 27/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /27 25/27 25/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 OH 62 OH ) 45 OH /30 25/27 27/ ) OH ) 54 OH ) 60 Table A: Summary of the different weighting arm types for cotton draft systems ) 1) 1) 1) PK 2025 PK 2035 PK 2055 Rear zone setting PK 2065 Fig. E: Zone settings for PK 2000 series weighting arms The rear zone setting depends on the type of fibre to be spun, length of fibre, and roving twist. Rear zone settings greater than those in the table should be selected if the material to be processed is difficult to be drafted. This may be the case with hardtwisted rovings or manmade fibres with strong fibres / fibre bonding. Inhouse trials should be carried out to determine the optimum rear zone setting. 1) Depends on the fibre to be spun, fibre length and roving twist. Fig. F: Roving guidance in the rear zone for PK 2055 / PK 2065 Chapter 946 Chapter 947
150 Roller loading Load setting Colour code on load selector Load (dan) In the case of PK 2000 weighting arms 4 different loads can be set for the front top roller using the eccentric load selector on the front guide arm. The setting load is indicated by the respective colour marking on the eccentric load selector: The selectable loads on the middle and rear top rollers for the individual PK 2000 weighting arms are given in fig. G (Weighting arms PK 2000 and their roller loads). Partial load white 6 Basic load black 10 Standard load green 14 Maximum load red 18 To achieve good yarn quality, it is advisable to use the 2nd load stage (green14 dan) for the front top roller when processing cotton and blends thereof. Pure manmade fibres, hardtwisted rovings, and fine yarn counts may require the 3rd load stage (red 18 dan). Here the load on the middle and rear element of PK 2025/PK 2035 weighting arms can, if necessary, be raised up to 14 dan (middle) and 16 dan (rear) and the load on the middle element of PK 2055/PK 2065 to 14 dan. If the OH 2042 (OH medium) is to process relatively long fibres or to spin fine yarn counts, the high load (14 dan) should be used at the apron top roller. If the ring spinning machine hasn't been used for longer time and soft front top rollers are used, the load on the front element of PK 2000 weighting arms can be set to the load stage (white 6 dan) (partial load) in order to prevent moiré effects. Weighting arm Front Apron Rear Ref. No. top roller top roller top roller [dan] [dan] [dan] PK 2000 Series PK (6) 1) PK (6) 1) PK (6) 1) PK (6) 1) ) Partial load Fig.G: Weighting arms PK 2000 and their roller loads. Setting the load on the front element The load on the front guide element can be set in 4 stages. Setting is effected by means of an eccentric load selector activated by the setting wrench The appropriate load can be identified by the code colour on the eccentric load selector visible in the opening of the front guide arm. The following load stages can be selected on the front element of PK 2000 series weighting arms: Partial load Basic load Standard load Maximum load Fig. H: Load stages on front guide element of PK 2000 series weighting arms Partial load PK 2000 weighting arms also allow partial load on front guide element. This becomes possible by setting the eccentric load selector to colour code "white" using setting wrench (Fig. I: Partial load). The partial load has a saddle load of 6 dan. Adjusting the load on the rear and middle element Two different loads are possible for the middle and rear element of the weighting arms PK 2025, PK 2035 and for the middle element of the weighting arms PK 2055, PK The load on the rear and middle element can be set by turning the eccentric load selector by means of hexagon socket screwdriver (see fig. J). The load set can be identified by the position of the eccentric load selector. A) Basic load The top edge of the eccentric load selector is in level with the upper edge of the element. B) Maximum load The top edge of the eccentric load selector is lowered to approx. 2.5 mm (see fig. K on page 950). Fig. I: Partial load at the front element of PK 2000 series weighting arms Fig J: Load setting with the hexagon socket screwdriver Chapter 948 Chapter 949 A B
151 Weighting arms PK 2025/PK 2035 Load Middle Rear element element [dan] [dan] Basic load Maximum load c) Long top apron cradles OH 122 for manmade fibres of cut lengths up to approx. 60 mm. The construction principle of the OH 62/OH 132/OH 122 cradles allows apron tolerances to be compensated with regard to apron guidance and stretching. Top apron cradles OH 2022/OH 2042 offer further additional advantages: aprons can be exchanged without the apron unit being dismantled, i.e. with the OH aggregate still in place. individual apron tensioning by means of movable apron guide places, less strain on the fibres and gentle guidance during the draft process. lowfriction apron running ensures low drive torques and long apron servicetime. Weighting arms PK 2055/PK 2065 Load Middle Rear element element [dan] [dan] Top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 2000 Top apron Gauge Top aprons cradles OH Tw general Basic equipment Colour Ref. No. [mm] designation Dist. clips 1) Ref. No. Basic load Maximum load OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OH PR 28 OH PR 32 OLC OLC OLC yellow lilac white A=2,5 mm OH ) 68.4 PR 2813 OH ) 75 PR 2813 OH PR 323 OLC OLC OLC red yellow white Fig. K: Load setting on the rear and middle element of PK 2000 Top apron cradles and top aprons OH PR 028 OH PR 032 OH PR 032 OLC OLC OLC yellow white grey Depending on the application, the weighting arms of PK 2000series can be fitted with different top apron cradles: a) Short top apron cradles OH 2022/OH 62 for cotton and manmade fibres up to 45 mm length and blends thereof b) Medium top apron cradles OH 2042/OH 132 for cotton fibres over 40 mm length, manmade fibres and blends thereof up to cut lengths of 54 mm. Fig. L: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 2000 weighting arms 1) One clip per cradle is required for each type of OH. These clips are not included in standard OH supply and have to be ordered separately. 2) For use in weighting arms of PK 2000 series only (high load setting (14 dan) at the middle element recommended). Chapter 950 Chapter 951
152 Opening X at apron release point The following information (see Figs. O1 to O5) is intended as a guide for the choice of distance clips to be used for various yarn counts. The vertical distance between the front edges of the top apron cradle, the type of aprons and the bottom apron nose bar determine the intensity with which the fibre material is controlled and guided between top and bottom aprons (fig. M). To achieve optimum draft conditions, the opening X can be adjusted using distance clips. Figs. N/O show which distance clips are to be used to provide the respective opening X for the various top apron cradles. As a basic rule of thumb: the smaller the opening, the more even the yarn gets. Selection of the opening X also depends on the following parameters: type of fibre material fibre mass in the main draft zone roving and yarn count type of top apron cradle type of apron and dimensions type of bottom apron nose bar and buildin position. Taking these parameters into account, the selection of the opening X represents something of a compromise. Extremely narrow openings produce good yarn qualities, though frame operating conditions (ends down, undrafted portions etc.) may, under certain circumstances, be negatively be influenced. The ideal opening for the fibre material to be processed in each case should thus be determined by mill trials. Opening X Distance clip OLC Colour Ref.No. Top apron cradle OH 2022 (short) OH 62 (short) Fig. M: Opening X OH 2042 (medium) OH 132 (medium) OH 122 (long) red * 2.5* 2.6 chrome yellow yellow * 2.2* 2.8* 3.3* 3.4* lilac * 2.5* white * 2.9* 3.5* 3.6* 3.7* light green grey * turquoise black orange beige green OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2022 Opening "x" in mm yellow lilac white light green Fig. N: OLC Distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradles (The figures in the column give the values for the opening X in mm.) * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. Chapter 952 Chapter 953 Ne Nm >40 >68 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 62 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 grey black * 2.5* 2.8* Fig. O1: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 2022 yellow lilac white light green grey turquoise turquoise black * 2.5* 2.9* Fig. O2: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 62
153 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 2042 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey black 2.4* * 3.2* 3.5* Fig. O3: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 2042 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 1225 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. turquoise turquoise black 2.6* * * Fig. O5: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 1225 OLC No. red chrome yellow OH 132 Opening "x" in mm Ne Nm >40 >68 yellow lilac white light green grey turquoise black 2.5* * * Fig. O4: Choice of distance clips in combination with Texparts top apron cradle OH 132 Top roller cots Top rollers for PK 2000 weighting arms are supplied as top rollers LP 1002 without cots as standard. If desired, Texparts will also supply top rollers with readyground cots. The cot quality can be determined by the customer. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm. With reference to the cot quality, rear and front top rollers are mutually interchangeable. Determining the choice of cot mainly depends on the type of fibre material to be processed and its running properties. Accotex cots having a hardness between 60 and 83 Shore A are used for rear and front top rollers today. In the case of soft cots, it is advisable to apply a low loading weight on the front top roller if the frame is idle for longer periods. This will prevent moiré formation caused by fluting. The weighting arms of PK 2000series are equipped with partial load on the front element. The partial load has a saddle load of 6 dan. Texparts supplies the apron top roller LP 1003 with plastic sleeves as standard for apron top roller. If requested, LP 1002 with cots can also be supplied as apron top roller. Accotex cots with a hardness of 80 Shore A are suitable for this apron top roller. * Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in OH supply. Chapter 954 Chapter 955
154 Bottom Aprons Series PK 5000 weighting arms for cotton roving frames pneumatic load principle The dimensions of the bottom aprons to be used depend on the design of the substructure of the draft system. In practice, two types of substructure are most common: 1. Long bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided and pretensioned by a tensioning link. 2. Short bottom apron system Bottom aprons are guided by specially designed bottom apron nose bars, no tensioning link is provided. Series PK 5000 weighting arms are intended for threeroller and fourroller doubleapron draft systems on cotton roving frames. They are suitable for spinning cotton, manmade fibres or blends thereof up to approx. 60 mm length. PK 5000 comprises the models PK (top roller cot diameter 28 mm) and PK (top roller cot diameter 35 mm) as a threeroller doubleapron draft system for spinning fibres according to the 3clamping point process (figs. A, C). The fourroller double apron draft system (PK and PK ) has an additional compression zone between the first and second bottom roller figs. B, D (I/1 and II/2). By deliberately condensing the fibre material in this zone, a reduction of the spinning delta is achieved, thus improving the incorporation of the fibres into the roving. This results in the following important advantages: reduced number of thread breakages (improved process reliability) increased efficiency greater package density at roving frame bobbin thanks to the more compact roving The fourroller doubleapron draft system (weighting arms PK and PK ) has an additional middle draft zone between the second and third bottom roller (II/2 and III/3), see figs B, E. Fig. A: PK 5000series for 3roller draft systems handle weighting elements pneumatic spring frame Fig. B: PK 5000series for 4roller draft systems Chapter 956 Chapter 957 support bar location hole for support bar leakage display bracket
155 PK PK Fig. C: Draft arrangements PK 5000 for 3roller versions PK PK Fig. E: Draft arrangement PK roller version PK and PK PK Sliver The sliver counts normally used in mill practice are between approx. 3.4 and 4.6 ktex (Nm 0.30 Nm 0.20). Sliver counts in this range guarantee ideal roving frame draft. Processing slivers of 3 ktex or finer on roving frame draft systems, is not recommended due to lacking fibre cohesion and the resultant risk of faulty draft during sliver feed from can to draft system. The maximum sliver count may not exceed 6 ktex (Nm 0.17). Draft sizes Total draft The amount of total draft on a four or threeroller doubleapron draft system is between 5 and 18 fold, a range of 512 fold providing the best results. Drafts greater than 12 fold are seldom employed as the total draft on a ring spinning machine should be as high as possible, for yarn quality reasons. Drafts lower than 5 fold should not be applied. For the 4roller doubleapron draft system a draft of approx is used as a support for condensation between the roller pair I/1 and II/2. PK Rear draft The task of the rear draft is to tension the fibre material in the rear zone and draw it Fig. D: Draft arrangement PK 5000 for 4roller version parallel. Rear drafts of between 1.12 and 1.18 are normally used in practice. Chapter 958 Chapter 959
156 Draft fields Front zone The front zone settings depend on the type of top apron cradle, the diameters of top and bottom rollers and the space required for the front zone condensers being used. The setting values will be found in the following figures F and G. A precondition for good spinning results is the correct setting of the individual draft system elements. A greater fibre mass of the sliver leads to increased friction of the fibres and thus effects autocontrol during the draft process. Special attention must be given here to the selection of the correct width of opening X. Excessive control in the front zone may lead to faulty draft or undrafted sections. Undrafted sections in the roving may, however, also be caused by selecting a freegauge distance that is too narrow. If such draft faults occur, the freegauge can be regulated by adjusting the fronthang of the front top roller or by regulating the bottom roller distance. If this is not enough, even when high load is set on the front top roller, the front zone of the roving frame must be extended. PK PK Weighting arm PK PK PK PK PK PK Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter I II III IV HF VF min Draft field mm VF usual Total draft field GFmm max Fibre length max. mm OH ) OH /32 30/32 25/27 30/ ** OH ) OH /32 30/32 25/27 30/ ** OH ) OH /32 25/27 30/ ) OH ) OH ) OH /32 25/27 30/ ) OH ) OH ) OH ) OH ) OH ) Fig. F: Zone settings and maximum fibre length PK 5000 PK PK PK ** Extension of the usability range because of GF max = 225 mm 1) VF usual depends on fibre length and fibre material. Fig. G: Draft field settings PK 5000 PK Chapter 960 Chapter 961
157 Roller loading PK rollers The weighting arms are supplied with nonoiled compressed air via a central air supply system. This air supply system is installed on the roving frame as a Tdistributor (see fig. H). The working pressure onto the top rollers can be set infinitely and centrally by the working pressure and thus, an optimum adjustment to the fibre material is possible. Due to the pneumatic spring in the weighting arm the working pressure is transformed into the saddle load directly via the pressure plates of the individual weighting elements. The setting is made with a corresponding control device in the pneumatic unit which incorporates an appropriate indicator instrument for this purpose. The roller loads on rear, apron and front top rollers are interlinked at a fixed ratio. This ratio is determined by the pressure plate size of the weighting elements. When the working pressure is changed, this ratio remains constant. The correlation between the set working pressure and the saddle load of all top rollers in the weighting arm is shown as a graph in fig. I. In most applications, a working pressure of bar is sufficient. In the case of manmade fibres or blends, a working pressure of 3.4 to 3.5 bar can be of advantage. Partial load The weighting arm PK 5000 offers the possibility of central partial load. This is applied to the top rollers due to the inherent elasticity of the pneumatic spring. It takes effect automatically when the ring spinning machine is turned off by the main switch. The partial load has been selected in such a way that top roller cots are protected from permanent deformation (no moiréeffect!). After switching on the roving frame, the preset weighting pressure builds up automatically. When this pressure has been reached, the weighting arms are ready for operation. PK rollers end piece Tpiece end piece pneumatic unit weighting arm connecting pipes between weighting arms Fig. H: Air supply system for PK 5000 series Fig. I: Correlation between saddle load and working pressure for PK 5000 series Chapter 962 Chapter 963
158 PK rollers Top apron cradle system Weighting arms of PK 5000series can be fitted with short staple cradle (OH 5022), medium staple cradle (OH 5042) or long staple cradle (OH 5245). Fig. J: Correlation between saddle load and working pressure for PK 5000 series models PK and PK Top apron cradles OH for PK PK OH 5022 short staple OH 5042 medium staple OH 5245 long staple PK PK PK PK OH 5022 short staple OH 5042 medium staple Applications of the cradles Cotton and manmade fibres, pure / blends thereof up to approx. 45 mm max. fibre length. Cotton and manmade fibres, pure / blends thereof up to approx. 54 mm max. fibre length. Manmade fibres of up to approx. 60 mm max. fibre length. Opening X at apron release point The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. K). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are of different colours (fig. L). The opening, which is necessary for a certain fibre material, is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar as well as on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Fig. K: Opening X Chapter 964 Chapter 965
159 Opening X Distance clip OLC Colour Ref.No. Top apron cradle for PK 5000 weighting arms white OLC grey OLC black OLC orange OLC beige OLC green OLC blue OLC brown OLC Fig. L: Recommended distance clips OLC in combination with Texparts top apron cradles for PK 5000 weighting arms Top aprons for PK 5000 OH 5022 (short) Apron top roller 25 mm Ø OH 5042 (medium) Apron top roller 25 mm Ø OH 5245 (long) Apron top roller 25 mm Ø The dimensions of top aprons have been standardised and are determined by the type of OH top apron cradle and the diameter of the apron top roller used (see fig. M). Top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 5000 Top roller cots When freshly covered and ground, the rear and front top rollers of the PK 5025 have a diameter of 28 mm. Quality and type of fibre material to be spun and running properties are decisive for the choice of cot. For top roller cots (rear, front LP 1015), a hardness of 83 Shore A is usual. As apron top roller, the LP 1015 with cot (25 mm diameter) is used. Texparts recommends Accotex cots with a hardness of 83 Shore A. Grinding Cot grinding intervals depend on the following: cot quality type of fibre material finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions weighting pressure of the top roller top roller running time. Grinding the spinning cots must not reduce the cot diameters by more than 3 mm. Within this diameter reduction range, no readjustment of the weighting arm height is necessary. The cot of the apron top roller LP 1015 may not be ground, as the top apron dimensions are matched to apron top rollers of fixed diameters. Bottom apron nose bar Top apron Gauge Top aprons Top roller Basic cradles OH Tw general Type equipment Ref. No. [mm] designation Ref. No. Distance clips 1) Ref. No. OLC OH PR 40 LP OLC OLC OLC OH PR 4010 LP OLC OLC OLC OH PR 4011 LP OLC OLC Fig. M: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 5000 weighting arms * Distance clips are not included in standard OH supply. The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes through the front zone. The recessed shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control through the doubleapron unit. The three different top apron cradle sizes OH 5022, OH 5042 and OH 5245 are to be matched up with the corresponding bottom apron nose bars (see chapter 5, page 8687). Condensers In roving frame draft systems, the task of the condensers is to evenly fold flank fibres back into the fibre material. The condenser should be neither too narrow, nor too wide in order to avoid possible faults in the draft process (see fig. O). For reasons of process reliability, closed condensers are recommended for use on roving frames, with the exception of the front zone condenser. Favourable crosssection ratios for the delivery aperture of closed condensers (height x width) of 1:4 or 1:5 have proved their worth. Chapter 966 Chapter 967
160 Rear roving guide The rear roving guide C is to be positioned as close as possible to the rear pair of rollers (see figs. N/O). When selecting the rear roving guide, take the position and type of the rovingguide rail into account. If the opening widths have been correctly chosen, any tangled sliver portions will be smoothed out and the fibre material will flow unchecked. Rear zone condenser The rear zone condenser B is positioned in front of the doubleapron unit (see fig. N). The lower edge of the front aperture lies on the draft plane. Its task is to lightly gather the fibre material before it enters the front zone or the doubleapron unit and gently fold any flank fibres which may have spread outwards back into the sliver body. Make sure that the opening width of the rear zone condenser is not too small, otherwise faulty draft may occur. The simplest and most reliable method of checking whether the passage aperture of the rear zone condenser has been correctly selected is shown in fig. O. Fig. N: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller and alignment of roving guides resp. condensers Front zone condenser The use of front zone condensers in roving frame draft systems has become generally accepted. Condensers opened at their bottom have proved to be particularly useful. The front zone condenser A gathers outspread flank fibres and returns them to the sliver (see fig. O). Subsequently the spinning delta is made smaller and roving breakages, lapping and fly formation are reduced. Particular care should be taken to precisely match the opening widths of the condensers not only to the roving gauge but also to the fibre characteristics (see table below). Inhouse trials should be carried out to do this. Front zone condenser Ref. No. KL KL KL KL Roving count 680 tex to 400 tex or Nm 1,5 to 2,5 (Ne 0,9 to 1,48) 1000 tex to 680 tex or Nm 1,0 to 1,5 (Ne 0,6 to 0,9) over 1000 tex or Nm 1,0 (Ne 0,6) Delivery aperture width and colour of front zone condenser 6 mm (yellow) 9 mm (colourless) 12 mm (black) or 16 mm (green) Fig. O: Correct opening width (left) and too narrow opening width (right) of condenser Chapter 968 Chapter 969
161 Series PK 1550 weighting arms for cotton roving frames Series PK 1550 weighting arms are intended for 3roller and 4roller double apron draft systems on cotton roving frames. They are suitable for spinning cotton, manmade fibres or blends thereof up to approx. 60 mm length. The PK 1550 weighting arm series comprises types PK (28 mm Ø top rollers) and PK (35 mm Ø top rollers) for 3roller double apron draft systems and type PK (28 mm Ø top rollers), which is designed for 4roller double apron draft equipment. The 4roller version differs from the 3roller version in having an additional condensing zone between the roller pairs I/1 and II/2 (see figs. A/B). By deliberately condensing the fibre material in this zone, a reduction in the spinning delta is achieved, thus improving the incorporation of the fibres into the roving. This results in the following important advantages: reduced number of thread breakages (improved process reliability) increased efficiency greater package density at roving frame bobbin thanks to the more compact roving Weighting arm 1 Bracket 2 Lever 3 Frame 4 Load indicator 5 Screw 6 Eccentric load selector 7 Handle 8 Front guide element 1 9 Saddle spring steel 10 Saddle spring plastic Middle guide element 2 13 Rear guide element 3 14 Height setting screw 15 Locking screw Equipment (not included in extent of supply) 16 Rear top roller 3 17 Top apron cradle system Apron top roller Top apron cradle Top apron 18 Front top roller 1 18 PK PK Fig. A: Draft arrangements PK 1550, 3roller version PK Fig. B: Draft arrangement PK 1550, 4roller version Chapter 970 Chapter 971
162 Drawing frame sliver feed Zone settings and maximum fibre length for PK 1550 The counts of drawing frame sliver feed normally used in mills are between approx. 3.4 and 4.6 ktex (Nm 0.30 Nm 0.22). Sliver counts in this range guarantee ideal roving frame draft. It is not recommended to process slivers of 3 ktex or finer on roving frame draft systems due to lacking fibre cohesion and the resultant risk of faulty draft during sliver feed from can to draft system. The maximum sliver count may not exceed 6 ktex (Nm 0.17). Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter 1) Top roller diameter Draft field mm I II III IV HF VF min VF usual Overall draft field GF mm max. Fibrelength max. mm Draft ratios PK ) OH ) OH /32 25/32 30/ Total draft The ratio of total draft on a four or threeroller doubleapron draft system is between 5 and 18fold, a range of 5 to 12fold provides best results. Drafts higher than 12fold are rarely employed as the total draft on a ring spinning machine should be as high as possible, for reasons of yarn quality. It's not recommended to operate roving frames at lower drafts than 5 as faulty draft may occur at such low total draft ratios. For the 4roller doubleapron draft system a draft tension of approx is used between roller pair I/1 and II/2 as a support for condensation (fig. D). Rear draft Rear draft is required to tension the fibre material in the rear zone and draw it parallel. Rear drafts of between 1.12 and 1.18 are normally used in practice. OH ) OH ) PK OH /32 25/32 30/ ) OH ) PK OH /32 30/32 25/32 30/ ) ) VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. Fig. C: Zone settings and maximum fibre length at PK 1550 Draft fields Front zone The front zone settings depend on the dimensions of the top apron cradle, diameters of top and bottom rollers and the space required for the front zone condensers. The setting values are listed in fig. C and fig. D. Correct setting of the individual draft system elements is the prerequisite for good spinning results. A larger quantity of fibres of the drafter sliver produces increased friction of the fibres and thus effectives autocontrol during the draft process. Special attention must be given to the determination of the correct width of the opening X. Excessive control in the front zone may lead to faulty drafted or undrafted sections. Undrafted sections of the roving frame roving, however, also may be caused by a slipdraft distance that is too narrow. If such draft faults occur, the slipdraft distance can be regulated by adjusting the overhang of the front top roller. If this is not enough, even when high load is set on the front top roller, the front zone of the roving frame must be extended. PK PK const.= 33 mm The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers depending on PK construction. Rear zone The rear zone setting depends on the fibre mass, fibre length and draft qualities of the fibre material to be spun. PK Fig. D: Draft field settings at PK 1550 Chapter 972 Chapter 973
163 Roller loading In roving frames, the load stage to be set on the weighting elements is determined by the type of fibre, the quantity of fibres and the amount of total draft. Basically, the larger the quantity of fibres, the higher the load is. For minor total drafts, comparatively high load have proved their worth. The various loads set on the weighting elements are matched to their respective positions (rear, apron and front top rollers). The fact that the weighting elements of the PK 1550 weighting arm are adjustable in three load stages (figs. E and F) means that they can be adapted to all spinning conditions commonly found in practice. As a basic setting for all weighting elements we recommend the middle load stage. Depending on the respective requirements, a different load stage can be set at the individual elements. The processing of manmade fibres and blends generally requires higher loads. Load that are too low may lead to faulty draft resulting in pullthrough and undrafted sections. By comparison with the threeroller zone draft system, lower front roller loads are used on fourroller step drafters as only a tensioning draft of 1.05 is employed in the condensing zone in front of the front pair of rollers (I/1 II/2). Load setting Load stages of individual elements PK , PK Load stages Front 1 PEL Middle 2 PEL Load stages of individual elements PK Rear 3 PEL Low 20 dan 10 dan 15 dan Middle 25 dan 15 dan 20 dan High 30 dan 20 dan 25 dan Load stages Front 1 PEL Middle 2 PEL Middle 3 PEL Rear 4 PEL Low 9 dan 15 dan 10 dan 10 dan Middle 12 dan 20 dan 15 dan 15 dan High 15 dan 25 dan 20 dan 20 dan Fig. F: Load stages of individual elements of PK 1550 Load setting is effected by means of an eccentric load selector activated by a special wrench (fig. E). Three load stages can be set on each weighting element. The three different load settings can be identified by the position of the load indicator on top of the guide arm. Top apron cradle system Weighting arms of PK 1550 series can be fitted with short (OH 5022), medium (OH 5042) or long (OH 5245) top apron cradles. low stage Top apron cradles OH for PK PK ) PK Applications of the cradles middle stage high stage Fig. E: Load setting of weighting elements at PK 1550 and possible load stages of the individual elements OH 5022 OH 5022 Cotton and manmade fibres, short short pure / blends, of up to approx. 45 mm max. fibre length. OH 5042 Cotton and manmade fibres, medium pure / blends, of up to approx. 54 mm max. fibre length. OH 5245 Manmade fibres of up to long approx. 60 mm max. fibre length. 1) For fibre lengths up to about 45 mm only. Chapter 974 Chapter 975
164 Opening X at apron release point The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. G). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are of different colours (fig. H). The opening, which is necessary for a certain fibre material, is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar as well as on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Opening X Fig. G: Opening X Distance clip OLC Top apron cradle (with apron top roller 25 mm Ø) OH 5022 (short) OH 5042 (middle) OH 5245 (long) Colour Ref. No. white OLC grey OLC black OLC orange OLC beige OLC green OLC blue OLC brown OLC Fig. H: Recommended distance clips OLC in combination with Texparts top apron cradles for PK 1550 weighting arms Top aprons for PK 1550 The dimensions of top aprons have been standardised and are determined by the type of top apron cradle OH and the diameter of the apron top roller used (see fig. I). Top apron Gauge Top aprons Top roller Basic equipm.* cradles OH Tw general Type Distance clips Ref. No. [mm] designation Ref. No. Ref. No. OH PR 40 LP OH PR 40 LP OH PR 4010 LP OH PR 4011 LP *Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. Fig. I: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 1550 weighting arms Top roller cots OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC OLC When freshly covered and ground, the rear and front top rollers of the PK , PK and PK have a diameter of 28 mm, whereas PK has 35 mm diameter. Quality and type of fibre material to be spun and running properties are decisive for the choice of cot. For top roller cots (rear, front LP 1015), a hardness of 83 Shore A is usual. As apron top roller, the LP 1015 with cot is used. Texparts recommends Accotex cots with a hardness of 83 Shore A. Chapter 976 Chapter 977
165 Grinding Cot grinding intervals depend on the following points: cot quality the type of fibre material finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions weighting pressure of the top roller top roller running time. Make sure that the opening width of the rear zone condenser is not too small, otherwise faulty draft may occur. The simplest and most reliable method of checking whether the passage aperture of the rear zone condenser has been determined correctly is shown in fig. K. Grinding must not reduce the cot diameters by more than 3 mm. Within this diameter reduction range, no readjustment of the weighting arm height position is necessary. The cot of the apron top roller LP 1015 may not be ground, as the top apron dimensions are matched to apron top rollers of fixed diameters. Bottom apron nose bar The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes through the front zone. The recessed shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control by the doubleapron unit. The three different top apron cradle sizes OH 5022, OH 5042 and OH 5245 are to be matched up with the corresponding bottom apron nose bars (see chapter 5, page 8687). Fig. J: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller and alignment of roving guides respective condensers Condensers In roving frame draft systems, the task of the condensers is to evenly fold flank fibres back into the fibre material. The condenser should be neither too narrow, nor too wide in order to avoid possible faults in the draft process (see fig. K ). For reasons of process reliability, closed condensers are recommended for use on roving frames, with the exception of the front zone condenser. Favourable crosssection ratios for the delivery aperture of closed condensers (height x width) of 1:4 or 1:5 have proved their worth. Rear roving guide The rear roving guide C has to be positioned as close as possible to the rear pair of rollers (see fig. J). When determing the rear roving guide, take the position and type of the rovingguide rail into account. If the opening widths have been chosen correctly, any tangled sliver portions will be smoothed out and the fibre material will flow unchecked. Rear zone condenser The rear zone condenser B is positioned in front of the doubleapron unit (see fig. J). The lower edge of the front aperture has to be in line with the draft plane. Its task is to slightly gather the fibre material before it enters the front zone or the doubleapron unit and to gently fold any flank fibres which may have spread outward back into the sliver body. Fig. K: Correct opening width (left) and too narrow opening width (right) of condenser Chapter 978 Chapter 979
166 Front zone condenser The use of front zone condensers in roving frame draft systems has become generally accepted. Condensers which are open at their bottom side have proved to be particularly useful. The front zone condenser A gathers outspread flank fibres and returns them to the sliver (see fig. K). Subsequently the spinning delta becomes smaller and roving breakages, lapping and fly generation are reduced. Particular care should be taken to precisely match of the opening widths of the condensers, not only to the roving gauge but also to the fibre characteristics (see table below). Inhouse trials should be carried out for exact determination of the opening width. Front zone Roving count Delivery aperture condenser width and colour of Ref. No. front zone condenser KL tex to 400 tex 6 mm (yellow) or Nm 1,5 to 2,5 (Ne 0,9 to 1,48) KL tex to 680 tex 9 mm (colourless) or Nm 1,0 to 1,5 (Ne 0,6 to 0,9) KL over 1000 tex or Nm 1,0 (Ne 0,6) 12 mm (black) or KL mm (green) Series PK 1500 weighting arms for cotton roving frames Series PK 1500 weighting arms are intended for 3roller and 4roller double apron draft systems on cotton roving frames. They are suitable for spinning cotton, manmade fibres or blends thereof up to approx. 60 mm length. The PK 1500 weighting arm series comprises types PK (28 mm Ø top rollers) and PK (35 mm Ø top rollers) for 3roller double apron draft systems and type PK (28 mm Ø top rollers), which is designed for 4roller double apron draft equipment. The 4roller version differs from the 3roller version in having an additional condensing zone between the roller pairs I/1 and II/2 (see figs. A/B). By deliberately condensing the fibre material in this zone, a reduction in the spinning delta is achieved, thus improving the incorporation of the fibres into the roving. This results in the following important advantages: reduced number of thread breakages (improved process reliability) increased efficiency greater package density at roving frame bobbin thanks to the more compact roving. reduced fly formation. PK PK Fig. A: Draft arrangements PK 1500, 3roller version Fig. B: Draft arrangement PK 1500, PK roller version Chapter 980 Chapter 981
167 2 Draft ratios Weighting arm PK Bracket 2 Lever 3 Clamp resp. washer 4 Screw 5 Knob 6 Frame 7 Eccentric load selector 8 Front guide element 1 9 Saddle spring 10 Middle guide element 2 11 Rear guide element 3 12 Height setting screw 13 Locking screw Equipment (not included in extent of supply) 14 Rear top roller 3 15 Top apron cradle system 16 Front top roller 1 17 Top apron Total draft The ratio of total draft on a four or threeroller doubleapron draft system is between 5 and 18fold, a range of 5 to 12fold provides best results. Drafts higher than 12fold are rarely employed as the total draft on a ring spinning machine should be as high as possible, for reasons of yarn quality. It's not recommended to operate roving frames at lower drafts than 5 as faulty draft may occur at such low total draft ratios. For the 4roller doubleapron draft system a draft tension of approx is used between roller pair I/1 and II/2 as a support for condensation (fig. D). Rear draft Rear draft is required to tension the fibre material in the rear zone and draw it parallel. Rear drafts of between 1.12 and 1.18 are normally used in practice. Draft fields Front zone The front zone settings depend on the dimensions of the top apron cradle, diameters of top and bottom rollers and the space required for the front zone condensers. The setting values are listed in fig. C and fig. D. Correct setting of the individual draft system elements is the prerequisite for good spinning results. A larger quantity of fibres of the drafter sliver produces increased friction of the fibres and thus effectives autocontrol during the draft process. Special attention must be given to the determination of the correct width of the opening X. Excessive control in the front zone may lead to faulty drafted or undrafted sections. Undrafted sections of the roving frame roving, however, also may be caused by a slipdraft distance that is too narrow. If such draft faults occur, the slipdraft distance can be regulated by adjusting the overhang of the front top roller. If this is not enough, even when high load is set on the front top roller, the front zone of the roving frame must be extended. Drawing frame sliver feed The counts of drawing frame sliver feed normally used in mills are between approx. 3.4 and 4.6 ktex (Nm 0.30 Nm 0.22). Sliver counts in this range guarantee ideal roving frame draft. It is not recommended to process slivers of 3 ktex or finer on roving frame draft systems due to lacking fibre cohesion and the resultant risk of faulty draft during sliver feed from can to draft system. The maximum sliver count may not exceed 6 ktex (Nm 0.17). Rear zone The rear zone setting depends on the fibre mass, fibre length and draft qualities of the fibre material to be spun. Chapter 982 Chapter 983
168 Zone settings and maximum fibre length for PK 1500 Roller loading Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter I II III IV HF VF min 1) VF usual depends on the fibre to be spun and fibre length. Fig. C: Zone settings and maximum fibre length PK 1500 Draft field mm VF usual Total draft field GFmm max Fibre length max. mm PK OH /32 30/32 25/27 30/ ) PK OH 514 PK ) OH /32 25/27 30/ ) OH ) OH ) OH /32 25/27 30/ ) OH ) In roving frames, the load stage to be set on the weighting elements is determined by the type of fibre, the quantity of fibres and the amount of total draft. Basically, the larger the quantity of fibres, the higher the load is. For minor total drafts, comparatively high load have proved their worth. The various loads set on the weighting elements are matched to their respective positions (rear, apron and front top rollers). The fact that the weighting elements of the PK 1500 weighting arm are adjustable in three load stages (fig. E and fig. F) means that they can be adapted to all spinning conditions commonly found in practice. As a basic setting for all weighting elements we recommend the middle load stage green. Depending on the respective requirements, a different load stage can be set at the individual elements. The processing of manmade fibres and blends generally requires higher loads. Load that are too low may lead to faulty draft resulting in pullthrough and undrafted sections. By comparison with the threeroller zone draft system, lower front roller loads are used on fourroller step drafters as only a tensioning draft of 1,05 is employed in the condensing zone in front of the front pair of rollers (I/1 II/2). Load stages of individual elements PK , PK Load stages Colour of eccentric load selector Front 1 PEL Middle 2 PEL Rear 3 PEL Low black 20 dan 10 dan 15 dan Middle green 25 dan 15 dan 20 dan High red 30 dan 20 dan 25 dan Load stages of individual elements PK PK PK const.= 33 mm The figure mentioned is the shortest possible distance of the bottom rollers depending on PK construction. Load stages Colour of eccentric load selector Front 1 PEL Middle 2 PEL Middle 3 PEL Rear 4 PEL Low black 9 dan 15 dan 10 dan 10 dan Middle green 12 dan 20 dan 15 dan 15 dan High red 15 dan 25 dan 25 dan 20 dan Fig. E: Load stages of individual elements of PK 1500 PK Fig. D: Draft field settings at PK 1500 Chapter 984 Chapter 985
169 Load setting Opening X at apron release point Load adjustment is effected by means of an eccentric load selector activated by a special wrench (fig. F). Three load stages can be set on each weighting element. The three different load settings can be identified by the code colour on the eccentric load selector on top of the guide arm. 2 1 The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. G). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are of different colours (fig. H). The opening, which is necessary for a certain fibre material, is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar as well as on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Fig. G: Opening X Fig. F: Load adjustment of weighting elements PK 1500 Top apron cradle system Opening X Weighting arms of PK 1500 series can be fitted with short (OH 514), medium (OH 534) or long (OH 524) top apron cradles. Top apron cradles OH for PK PK ) PK Applications of the cradles OH 514 OH 514 Cotton and manmade fibres, short short pure / blends, of up to approx. 45 mm max. fibre length. OH 534 Cotton and manmade fibres, medium pure / blends, of up to approx. 54 mm max. fibre length. Distance clip OLC Top apron cradle (with apron top roller 25 mm Ø) OH 514 (short) OH 534 (middle) OH 524 (long) Colour Ref. No. white OLC grey OLC black OLC orange OLC beige OLC green OLC Fig. H: Recommended distance clips OLC in combination with Texparts top apron cradles for PK 1500 weighting arms OH 524 Manmade fibres of up to long approx. 60 mm max. fibre length. 1) For fibre lengths up to about 45 mm only. Chapter 986 Chapter 987
170 Top aprons for PK 1500 The dimensions of top aprons have been standardised and are determined by the type of top apron cradle OH and the diameter of the apron top roller used (see fig. I). Top apron Gauge Top aprons Top roller Basic equipm.* cradles OH Tw general Type Distance clips Ref. No. [mm] designation Ref. No. Ref. No. OH PR 40 LP OLC OH PR 40 LP OLC OH PR 40 LP OLC OH PR 4010 LP OLC OH PR 4010 LP OLC OH PR 4010 LP OLC OLC OH PR 4011 LP OLC OLC *Basic equipment of distance clips. Clips are not included in standard OH supply. Fig. I: Range of top apron cradles, top aprons and distance clips for PK 1500 weighting arms Grinding Cot grinding intervals depend on the following points: cot quality the type of fibre material finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions weighting pressure of the top roller top roller running time. Grinding the spinning cots must not reduce the cot diameters by more than 3 mm. Within this diameter reduction range, no readjustment of the weighting arm height position is necessary. The cot of the apron top roller LP 1017 may not be ground, as the top apron dimensions are matched to apron top rollers of fixed diameters. Bottom apron nose bar The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes through the front zone. The recessed shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control by the doubleapron unit. The three different top apron cradle sizes OH 514, OH 534 and OH 524 are to be matched up with the corresponding bottom apron nose bars (see chapter 5, page 8687). Top roller cots When freshly covered and ground, the rear and front top rollers of the PK and PK have a diameter of 28 mm, whereas the rear and front top rollers of the PK have 35 mm diameter. Quality and type of fibre material to be spun and running properties are decisive for the choice of cot. For top roller cots (rear, front LP 1015) a hardness of 83 Shore A is usual. As apron top roller, the LP 1017 with cot is used. Texparts recommends Accotex cots with a hardness of 83 Shore A. Condensers In roving frame draft systems, the task of the condensers is to evenly fold flank fibres back into the fibre material. The condenser should be neither too narrow, nor too wide in order to avoid possible faults in the draft process (see fig. K ). For reasons of process reliability, closed condensers are recommended for use on roving frames, with the exception of the front zone condenser. Favourable crosssection ratios for the delivery aperture of closed condensers (height x width) of 1:4 or 1:5 have proved their worth. Rear roving guide The rear roving guide C is to be positioned as close as possible to the rear pair of rollers (see fig. J). When determing the rear roving guide, take the position and type of the rovingguide rail into account. If the opening widths have been chosen correctly, any tangled sliver portions will be smoothed out and the fibre material will flow unchecked. Chapter 988 Chapter 989
171 Rear zone condenser The rear zone condenser B is positioned in front of the doubleapron unit (see fig. J). The lower edge of the front aperture has to be in line with the draft plane. Its task is to slightly gather the fibre material before it enters the front zone or the doubleapron unit and to gently fold any flank fibres which may have spread outward back into the sliver body. Make sure that the opening width of the rear zone condenser is not too small, otherwise faulty draft may occur. The simplest and most reliable method of checking whether the passage aperture of the rear zone condenser has been determined correctly is shown in fig. K. Front zone condenser The use of front zone condensers in roving frame draft systems has become generally accepted. Condensers which are open at their bottom side have proved to be particularly useful. The front zone condenser A gathers outspread flank fibres and returns them to the sliver (see fig. K). Subsequently the spinning delta becomes smaller and roving breakages, lapping and fly generation are reduced. Particular care should be taken to precisely match of the opening widths of the condensers, not only to the roving gauge but also to the fibre characteristics (see table below). Inhouse trials should be carried out for exact determination of the opening width. Front zone Roving count Delivery aperture condenser width and colour of Ref. No. front zone condenser Fig. J: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller and alignment of roving guides respective condensers KL tex to 400 tex 6 mm (yellow) or Nm 1,5 to 2,5 (Ne 0,9 to 1,48) KL tex to 680 tex 9 mm (colourless) or Nm 1,0 to 1,5 (Ne 0,6 to 0,9) KL over 1000 tex or Nm 1,0 (Ne 0,6) 12 mm (black) or KL mm (green) Fig. K: Correct opening width (left) and too narrow opening width (right) of condenser Chapter 990 Chapter 991
172 Series Series PK PK weighting weighting arms arms for for worsted worsted ring ring spinning spinning machines machines pneumatic load load principle principle The PK 6000 weighting arm is suitable for spinning wool, manmade fibres and blends of these materials as well as dryspun bast fibres up to a fibre length of about 200 mm. The 3roller doubleapron draft system works according to the slipdraft principle, with a recessed roller as the apron top roller. Depending on the type of preparation, twisted roving or Frenchtype roving can be fed to the draft system. The weighting pressures on the top rollers are set infinitely and centrally using a nonoiled compressed air supply system. The latter is installed on the ring spinning machine in form of a ring main to which the weighting arms are connected. The ring main is supplied with controlled air pressure via a pneumatic unit. The saddle load of the top rollers depends on the pressure in the ring main and on the size of the pressure plates of the weighting elements. The PK 6000 weighting arm permits a central partial load relieve when the compressed air system is turned off. 1 Bracket 2 Pushin connection for air pipe 3 Leakage air display 4 Eccentric screw for height adjustment 5 Valve 6 Pneumatic spring Rear weighting element (with pressure plate) 8 Arm 9 Middle weighting element (with pressure plate) 10 Handle 11 Front weighting element (with pressure plate) Draft ratios Total draft Total draft is determined by the type, composition and preparation of the fibre material to be processed. The total draft ranges recommended in fig. B have proved to be practical for the various types of material. Nevertheless, applicable draft ratios must be determined by inhouse spinning trials, using good yarn quality and acceptable machine operating conditions. Fibre material Usual number Remarks of total drafts Wool 1230 In contrast to Frenchtype rovings, Wool/manmade fibres 1835 higher total drafts should be selected for twisted rovings. Manmade fibres In the case of blends, higher total Cut staple 2040 drafts become possible as the Filament tow 3060 proportion of manmade fibre increases Fig. B: Total draft range Rear zone draft In the case of 3roller doubleapron draft systems using the slipdraft method (recessed roller), tension of the roving in the rear draft zone is necessary. The roving should be well stretched when it enters the double apron unit. Rear drafts of 1.10 to 1.25 have proved to be best. Draft fields Total draft field For the PK 6000 the maximum total draft field length GF max = 223 mm. The total draft field length can be approximately determined as follows: GF = maximum fibre length + approx. 15 % Rear zone setting The rear zone setting (VF) basically depends on the maximum fibre length. In order to determine the rear zone setting, the standard dimension of the front zone HF (105 mm) must be subtracted from the total draft field length GF already determined. VF = GF (calculated) 105 mm (standard dimension) Fig. A: Weighting arm PK With twisted roving, it may be necessary to set a higher rear zone distance. In this connection, we recommend inhouse trials to be carried out. Chapter 992 Chapter 993
173 Front zone setting In the case of PK 6000 weighting arm, the front zone setting (HF) is determined by the top apron cradle system OH For the bottom roller diameters shown in fig. C, the front zone setting is always constant, amounting to 105 mm. To support apron running properties, the apron top roller is set at a backhang of 2 mm. If front zone condensers are used, the front top roller is set at 7 mm fronthang (see fig. C). A smaller fronthang may be selected, if no front zone condenser or a special condenser is employed. Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter Draft field mm I II III HF VF min VF usual Total draft field GF mm max Fibre length max. mm PK OH /40 27/ / ) 2) ) Without rear zone condenser the rear zone setting reduces to 45 mm at min. 2) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Roller loading The weighting pressure onto the top rollers can be set infinitely and centrally through the working pressure and thus, an optimum adjustment to the fibre material is possible. Due to the pneumatic spring in the weighting arm the working pressure is transformed into the saddle load directly via the pressure plates of the individual weighting elements. The roller loads on rear, apron and front top rollers are interlinked at a fixed ratio. This ratio is determined by the pressure plate sizes of the weighting elements. When the working pressure is changed, this ratio remains constant. The correlation between the working pressure and saddle load of all top rollers in the weighting arm is shown as a graph in fig. D. In most applications, a working pressure of bars is sufficient. In the case of fibre materials with poor draft properties, a weighting pressure of 3.0 to 4.0 bar can be of advantage. In the case of fibre material with low fibre adhesiveness or pressuresensitive fibres, a weighting pressure of 1.5 to 2.5 bars is recommended. The fibres are not gripped by the apron top roller, which is designed as a recessed roller. As a result of the system design the working pressure for the apron top roller is lower than that of the rear and front top roller (see lower characteristic line in graph of fig. D). PK Partial load The weighting arms PK 6000 offer the possibility of central partial load. This is applied to the top rollers thanks to the inherent elasticity of the pneumatic spring. It takes effect automatically when the ring spinning machine is turned off at the main switch. The partial load has been determined in a way, that it reliably prevents intrusion of the yarn twist into the draft field, and even soft top roller cots are protected from permanent deformation (no moiré effect!). After switchon of the ring spinning machine, the preset weighting pressure builds up automatically. When this pressure has been reached, the weighting arms are ready for operation. Fig. C: Draft field width and maximum fibre length at PK 6000 Chapter 994 Chapter 995
174 Top apron cradle system The top apron cradle system OH 6022 is available for the weighting arm PK The design principle of the OH 6022 permits compensation of apron tolerances with its individualised apron tensions. The individual apron tension results simultaneously in low strain on the fibre and gentle fibre guidance during draft. The lowfriction apron running ensures a lowdrive torque and long apron servicelife. The top aprons can be changed quickly and easily without removal of the top apron cradle system, even while still installed in the ring spinning machine. The contact pressure on the distance clip OLC is introduced directly via the apron top roller weighting element. Fig. E shows the top apron cradle OH 6022, the appropriate top apron designations, the corresponding apron widths as well as the prescribed diameters of the apron top rollers. Top apron Gauge Top apron Top Basic equipm.* Colour cradle Tw roller apron Distance clips types [mm] Ref. No. OH LP PR OLC black OH LP PR OLC beige OLC green * Distance clips are not included in standard OH supply Fig. E: Top apron cradles and distance clips for PK 6000 Opening X at apron release point Fig. D: Correlation between saddle load and working pressure at PK 6000 The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. F). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are of different colours (fig. G). The opening, which is necessary for a certain fibre material, is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar as well as on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Fig. F: Opening X Chapter 996 Chapter 997
175 OLC distance clip Ref. No. Fig. G: Distance clips OLC and opening X Top rollers and cots Colour Opening X in mm with top apron cradle OH 6022 OLC black 2.6 OLC beige 3.7 OLC green 4.1 OLC pink 5.6 OLC blue 8.0 In the PK 6000 weighting arm, the rear and front top rollers with newly fitted cots should have 50 mm cot diameter after first grinding. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm or increase the loading via increasing the air pressure. The system diameter of the apron top roller is 33 mm and must be kept precisely on account of the specified apron length. Usually the top rollers are supplied without cots. If required, however, Texparts can also supply top rollers with cots fitted and ground. The cot quality can be specified by the customer. The cot diameters of top rollers with newly fitted cots are shown in fig. H. Rear and front top roller Top roller d 1 d 2 b E LP /32 34 Apron top roller as recessed roller Top roller d 1 d 2 W b K T Feed sliver count 0.5 for Frenchtype rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer 1.0 for Frenchtype rovings of LP approx tex (Nm 1.0) and coarser, twisted roving LP approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer 1.5 for twisted rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and coarser sizes, d also for fibre materials with 1 = outer ring diameter of version with cot [mm] poor draft properties d 2 = diameter over cot [mm] b = cot width [mm] W = apron width [mm] E = width of outer ring [mm] T = recess depth [mm] The grinding cycles for the rear and front top rollers depend on: cot quality weighting pressure type of fibre to be processed production speed finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions top roller operating time. In addition, in selecting the cot quality to suit the fibre, the cot should have accurately shaped edges, true, concentric running behaviour and a goodgrip surface. For the rear and front top rollers we recommend cots with a hardness between 80 Shore A to 85 Shore A, and for the apron top roller cots with a hardness between 75 Shore A to 80 Shore A. In the case of recessed apron top rollers, deviating fibre characteristics may require a variety of recess depths T. Ideal values must be determined by inhouse spinning trials of the spinning mill, taking the fibre masses and fibre properties into account. Outer ring and cot dimensions of rear and front top rollers Outer ring and cot dimensions of apron top rollers Fig. H: Top rollers with cot and outer ring dimensions for PK 6000 Chapter 998 Chapter 999
176 Recessed rollers The recess depth of the apron top roller has a crucial effect on the intensity of fibre guidance and fibre control. It is an important instrument to achieve optimum yarn quality. Recess depths that are too low can impair both, yarn quality and running properties. In practice, the recess depths listed in fig. H on the prior page are used. If high loads are applied, an adequate recess depth must be assured to compensate the flattening of the cot of the apron top roller. Monoclearer roller system Bottom apron nose bar Long bottom apron system The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes the front zone. The slightly convex shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control in the main draft zone. The height of the nose bar generally is 2.5 mm above the draft plane 1 (see fig. L). In special cases a higher nose bar position (with interchangeable washer 2) up to approx. 4 mm can be provided. A lower nose bar position (bar on the same level as the draft plane) may be more favourable in the case of fibres with high fibre adhesiveness. To clean the front top roller and prevent laps, a monoclearer roller system is available for the PK 6000 weighting arm (fig. I). The monoclearer roller system is guided by a swivelling, springloaded clearer roller holder and lightly pressed against the top roller. Its exact parallel guidance ensures an excellent cleaning effect. It can be detached from the clearer roller holder for quick and easy cleaning. Fig. I: Monoclearer roller system for PK 6000 Fig. L: Draft plane with long bottom apron system Condensers for PK 6000 Front zone condenser The front zone condenser A is fitted in the main draft zone between the apron unit and the front pair of rollers (see fig. M). The task of the condenser is to selvedge the fibre material coming from the apron unit and prevent the flank fibres from spreading out. The front zone condenser is suspended from the guide head of the front weighting element by means of a special securing spring. Care must be taken not to restrict the front zone condenser s range of play, as this may lead to a drop in quality. Fig. M: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top rollers and arrangement of condensers Chapter 9100 Chapter 9101
177 Rear zone condenser The rear zone condenser B is employed in the draft system of worsted ring spinning machines (see fig. N). We recommend version KL This condenser is positioned ahead of the apron unit. Its shape is made in such a way that the roving is smoothed when it runs into the following doubleapron unit. The rear zone condenser is coupled to the rear roving guide and copies the latter s traverse motion. The task of the rear zone condenser is to ensure that the roving only passes through the apron roller pair within the recessed portion of the upper apron roller. The traverse motion must be adjusted in such a way that this condition can be fulfilled reliably. Front zone Gauge Tw Remarks Symbol condenser in mm Ref.No. Series PK 1660 weighting arms for worsted ring spinning machines Texparts PK 1660series weighting arm is mainly intended for 3roller doubleapron draft systems on worsted ring spinning machines. PK 1660 weighting arm is suitable for spinning wool, manmade fibres or blends thereof as well as dryspun bastfibres up to approx. 200 mm length. A recessed roller is used as apron top roller. Thus the draft system works according to the slipdraft method having a single draftfield. Depending on the respective preparation method, twisted or French type rovings can be processed on the draft system. KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum secured by cheesehead screw KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum with spring suspension Rear zone condenser Ref. No. KL Fig. N: Condensers for PK 6000 PK Fig. A: PK 1660 for worsted ring spinning machines Draft ratios Total draft Total draft is determined by the type, composition and preparation of the fibre material to be processed. The total draft ranges recommended in fig. B have proved to be practical for the various types of material. Nevertheless, applicable draft ratios must be determined by inhouse spinning trials, using good yarn quality and acceptable machine operating conditions. Chapter 9102 Chapter 9103
178 Weighting arm PK Bracket 2 Lever 3 Load indicator 4 Screw 5 Frame 6 Eccentric load selector 7 Knob 8 Front guide element 1 9 Saddle spring 10 Middle guide element 2 11 Rear guide element 3 12 Height setting screw 13 Locking screw Fibre material Usual number Remarks of total drafts Wool In contrast to Frenchtype rovings, Wool/manmade fibres higher total drafts should be selected for twisted rovings. Manmade fibres In the case of blends, higher total Cut staple drafts become possible as the Filament tow proportion of manmade fibre increases. Fig. B: Total draft range Rear draft In threeroller doubleapron draft systems with controlled slip draft of the fibre (recessed roller), it is necessary to pretension the roving at the rear zone. The roving should be guided into the doubleapron unit in a wellstretched condition. Rear drafts between 1.10 and 1.25 have shown good results. Equipment (not included in extent of supply) Draft fields Rear top roller 3 15 Top apron cradle system Apron top roller 2 Top apron cradle Top apron 16 Front top roller 1 Total draftfield length For the PK 1660 the maximum total draftfield length GF max. = 223 mm. The total draftfield length can be approximately determined as follows: GF = maximum fibre length + approx. 15 % Front zone setting In the case of PK 1660 weighting arm, the front zone setting (HF) is determined by the top apron cradle OH 2402 or OH 554. For the bottom roller diameters shown in fig. C, the front zone setting is always constant, amounting to 105 mm. To support apron running properties, the apron top roller is set at a backhang of 2 mm. If front zone condensers are used, the front top roller is set at 7 mm fronthang (see fig. C). A smaller fronthang may be selected, if no front zone condenser or a special condenser is employed. Rear zone setting The rear zone setting (VF) basically depends on the maximum fibre length. In order to determine the rear zone setting, the standard dimension of the front zone (105 mm) must be subtracted from the total draftfield length already determined. VF = GF (calculated) 105 mm (standard dimension) Chapter 9104 Chapter 9105
179 Weighting arm max. rear zone min. rear zone setting setting PK mm 57 mm In the case of twisted roving, a longer rear zone setting may be required. Therefore we recommend inhouse trials to be carried out. Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter Draft field mm I II III HF VF min VF usual Total draft field GF mm max Fibre length max. mm PK OH /40 27/ / ) 2) OH /40 27/ / ) 2) ) Without rear zone condenser the rear zone setting reduces to 45 mm at min. 2) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Roller loading PK 1660 weighting arm is fitted with three load stages on each weighting element (see fig. D) These are set by turning the relevant eccentric load selector. Experiences have shown that the middle load stage at the rear and front top roller is adequate for most applications on PK With fibre material that is difficult to draft manmade fibres for instance it may be necessary to increase load to high load stage. Low load stage is to be used for fibre material with low fibre drag. If the yarn shows thick, undrafted portions at the front pair of rollers, the nexthigher load stage should be set on the front top roller. It is a feature of the system that the fibres are not nipped by the recessed apron top roller. Select the load stage which guarantees even, reliable running of top and bottom aprons. Excessive loads on the apron top roller may reduce the depth of the apron top roller recess. Load stages of weighting elements Load indicator Front 1 Middle 2 Rear 3 PEL PEL PEL low 20 dan 9 dan 20 dan middle 27 dan 12 dan 25 dan high 35 dan 15 dan 30 dan low stage middle stage Fig. D: Load stages of weighting elements high stage PK Fig. C: Draft field width and maximum fibre length at PK Fig. E: Load setting of weighting elements Chapter 9106 Chapter 9107
180 Partial load PK 1660 weighting arm is equipped with a partial load feature (see fig. F). Opening the Iever to its first rest position activates the partial load. If the ring spinning machine will not be used for longer time this feature allows the front top roller to be released to partial load of approx. 5 dan. The partial load has been determined in such a way that it reliably prevents intrusion of the yarn twist into the draft field, and top roller cots are protected from permanent deformation (no moiré effect!). Top apron Gauge Top apron Top Basic equipm.* Colour cradle Tw roller apron Distance clips types [mm] OH LP PR 3217 OH LP PR 32/5 OH LP PR 4017 OH LP PR 40/5 OH LP PR 40/5 OH LP PR 40/5 * Distance clips are not included in standard OH supply. Fig. G: Top apron cradles and distance clips for PK 1601 OLC OLC OLC black beige green Top apron cradles Fig. F: Partial load Texparts PK 1660 weighting arm can be fitted with OH 2402 or OH 554 top apron cradles. For description of top apron cradles see chapter 5, page The OH 2402 supersedes the previous cradle OH 554 and is totally compatible to this concerning types of top rollers and colour of distance clips (which indicates openings). So existing top rollers and distance clips from Texparts can be used further on without any problems on OH 2402, too. As top aprons we recommend to use PR 3217 (gauge 75 mm) and PR 4017 (gauge 82.5 mm). Existing apron sizes with designation PR 32/5 (gauge 75 mm) and PR 40/5 (gauge 82.5 mm) respectively can be used further on with the OH 2402, if the backhang of the apron top roller can be set to 3 mm. Fig. G shows the top apron cradles, the appropriate top apron designations, the corresponding apron widths as well as the prescribed diameters of the apron top rollers. Opening X at apron release point The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. H). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are made in different colours (fig. I). The opening "X" needed for a certain fibre material is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar and on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Practice has shown that, in general, three distance clips are adequate for the entire range of counts handled in worsted mills (OLC , OLC , OLC ). Available OLCclips are listed in fig. I. OLC distance clip Colour Opening X in mm with OH 2402 Opening X in mm with OH black orange beige green pink blue Fig. H: Opening X Fig. I: Distance clips OLC and opening X Chapter 9108 Chapter 9109
181 Top roller cots In the PK 1660 weighting arm, the rear and front top rollers with newly fitted cots should have 50 mm cot diameter after first grinding. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm. The system diameter of the apron top roller is 48 mm and must be kept precisely on account of the specified apron length. Usually the top rollers are supplied without cots. If required, however, Texparts can also supply top rollers with cots fitted and ground. The cot quality can be specified by the customer. The cot diameters of top rollers with newly fitted cots are shown in fig. K on the following page. Cot grinding intervals of rear and front top rollers depend on the following: cot quality type of fibre to be processed finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions weighting pressure of top roller top roller operating time. In addition, in selecting the cot quality to suit the fibre, the cot should have accurately shaped edges, true, concentric running behaviour and a goodgrip surface. For the rear and front top rollers we recommend cots with a hardness between 80 Shore A to 85 Shore A, and for the apron top roller cots with a hardness between 75 Shore A to 80 Shore A. In the case of recessed apron top rollers, deviating fibre characteristics may require a variety of recess depths T. Ideal values must be determined by inhouse spinning trials of the spinning mill, taking the fibre masses and fibre properties into account. Rear and front top rollers Top roller d 1 d 2 b E LP /32 34 Apron top roller as recessed roller Top roller d 1 d 2 W b K T Feed sliver count 0.5 for Frenchtype rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer LP for Frenchtype rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) LP and coarser, twisted roving approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer 1.5 for twisted rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and coarser sizes, also for fibre materials with poor draft properties d 1 = outer ring diameter of version with cot [mm] d 2 = diameter over cot [mm] b = cot width [mm] W = apron width [mm] E = width of outer ring [mm] T = recess depth [mm] Recessed rollers The recess depth of the apron top roller has a crucial effect on the intensity of fibre guidance and fibre control. It is an important instrument for achieving optimum yarn quality. Selected recess depths that are too low can impair both yarn quality and running properties. In practice, the recess depths listed in fig. J on the following page are used. If high loads are applied, an adequate recess depth must be assured to compensate for the flattening of the cot of the apron top roller. Outer ring and cot dimensions of rear and front top rollers Outer ring and cot dimensions of apron top rollers Fig. J: Top rollers with cot and outer ring dimensions for PK 1660 Chapter 9110 Chapter 9111
182 Bottom apron nose bar Long bottom apron system The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes the front zone. The slightly convex shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control in the main draft zone. The height of the nose bar generally is 2.5 mm above the draft plane 1 (see fig. K). In special cases a higher nose bar position (with interchangeable washer 2) up to approx. 4 mm can be provided. A lower nose bar position (bar on the same level as the draft plane) may be more favourable in the case of fibres with high fibre adhesiveness. Fig. K: Draft plane with long bottom apron system Condensers for PK 1660 Front zone condenser The front zone condenser A is fitted in the main draft zone between the apron unit and the front pair of rollers (see fig. L). The task of the condenser is to selvedge the fibre material coming from the apron unit and prevent the flank fibres from spreading out. The front zone condenser is suspended from the guide head of the front weighting element by means of a special securing spring. Care must be taken not to restrict the front zone condenser range of play, as this may lead to a drop in quality. Fig. L: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller and arrangement of condensers Rear zone condenser The rear zone condenser B is employed in the draft system of worsted ring spinning machines (see fig. M). We recommend version KL This condenser is positioned ahead of the apron unit. Its shape is made in such a way that the roving is smoothed when it runs into the following doubleapron unit. The rear zone condenser is coupled to the rear roving guide and copies the latter s traverse motion. The task of the rear zone condenser is to ensure that the roving only passes through the apron roller pair within the recessed portion of the upper apron roller. The traverse motion must be adjusted in such a way that this condition can be fulfilled reliably. Front zone Gauge Tw Remarks Symbol condenser in [mm] Ref. No. KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum secured KL by cheesehead screw KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum with spring KL suspension Rear zone condenser Ref. No. KL Fig. M: Condensers for PK 1660 Chapter 9112 Chapter 9113
183 Series PK 1601 weighting arms for worsted ring spinning machines Texparts PK 1601series weighting arm is mainly intended for 3roller doubleapron draft systems on worsted ring spinning machines. PK 1601 weighting arm is suitable for spinning wool, manmade fibres or blends thereof as well as dryspun bastfibres up to approx. 200 mm length. A recessed roller is used as apron top roller. Thus the draft system works according to the slipdraft method having a single draftfield. Depending on the respective preparation method, twisted or French type rovings can be processed on the draft system Weighting arm PK Bracket 2 Lever 3 Washer 4 Screw 5 Frame 6 Knob 7 Eccentric load selector 8 Front guide element 1 9 Saddle spring 10 Middle guide element 2 11 Rear guide element 3 12 Height setting screw 13 Locking screw Equipment (not included in extent of supply) 14 Rear top roller 3 15 Top apron cradle system Apron top roller 2 Top apron cradle Top apron 16 Front top roller 1 PK Fig. A: PK 1601 for worsted ring spinning machines 16 Draft ratios Total draft Total draft is determined by the type, composition and preparation of the fibre material to be processed. The total draft ranges recommended in fig. B have proved to be practical for the various types of material. Nevertheless, applicable draft ratios must be determined by inhouse spinning trials, using good yarn quality and acceptable machine operating conditions. Chapter 9114 Chapter 9115
184 Fibre material Usual number Remarks of total drafts Wool In contrast to Frenchtype rovings, Wool/manmade fibres higher total drafts should be selected for twisted rovings. Manmade fibres In the case of blends, higher total Cut staple drafts become possible as the Filament tow proportion of manmade fibre increases Fig. B: Total draft range Rear draft In threeroller doubleapron draft systems with controlled slip draft of the fibre (recessed roller), it is necessary to pretension the roving at the rear zone. The roving should be guided into the doubleapron unit in a wellstretched condition. Rear drafts between 1.10 and 1.25 have shown good results. Draft fields Weighting arm max. rear zone min. rear zone setting setting PK mm 57 mm In the case of twisted roving, a longer rear zone setting may be required. Therefore we recommend inhouse trials to be carried out. Weighting arm Top apron cradle Bottom roller diameter Draft field mm I II III HF VF min VF usual Total draft field GF mm max Fibre length max. mm PK OH /40 27/ / ) 2) OH /40 27/ / ) 2) ) Without rear zone condenser the rear zone setting reduces to 45 mm at min. 2) Depends on fibre length and roving material. Total draftfield length For the PK 1601 the maximum total draftfield length GF max. = 223 mm. The total draftfield length can be approximately determined as follows: GF = maximum fibre length + approx. 15 % Front zone setting In the case of PK 1601 weighting arm, the front zone setting (HF) is determined by the top apron cradle OH 2402 or OH 554. For the bottom roller diameters shown in fig. C, the front zone setting is always constant, amounting to 105 mm. To support apron running properties, the apron top roller is set at a backhang of 2 mm. If front zone condensers are used, the front top roller is set at 7 mm fronthang (see fig. C). A smaller fronthang may be selected, if no front zone condenser or a special condenser is employed. PK Fig. C: Draft field width and maximum fibre length at PK Rear zone setting The rear zone setting (VF) basically depends on the maximum fibre length. In order to determine the rear zone setting, the standard dimension of the front zone (105 mm) must be subtracted from the total draftfield length already determined. VF = GF (calculated) 105 mm (standard dimension) Chapter 9116 Chapter 9117
185 Roller loading Partial load PK 1601 weighting arm is fitted with three load stages on each weighting element (see fig. D). These are set by turning the relevant eccentric load selector. Experiences have shown that the load stage green at the rear and front top roller is adequate for most applications on PK With fibre material that is difficult to draft manmade fibres for instance it may be necessary to increase load to stage 3 (red). Basic load (black) is to be used for fibre material with low fibre drag. If the yarn shows thick, undrafted portions at the front pair of rollers, the nexthigher load stage should be set on the front top roller. It is a feature of the system that the fibres are not nipped by the recessed apron top roller. Select the load stage which guarantees even, reliable running of top and bottom aprons. Excessive loads on the apron top roller may reduce the depth of the apron top roller recess. PK 1601 weighting arm is equipped with a partial load feature (see fig. F). Opening the Iever to its first rest position activates the partial load. If the ring spinning machine hasn't been used for longer time, this feature allows the front top roller to be released to a partial load of approx. 5 dan. The partial load has been determined in such a way that it reliably prevents intrusion of the yarn twist into the draft field, and even soft top roller cots are protected from permanent deformation (no moiré effect!). Load stages of weighting elements Colour marking on Front 1 Middle 2 Rear 3 eccentric load selector PEL PEL PEL black 20 dan 9 dan 20 dan green 27 dan 12 dan 25 dan red 35 dan 15 dan 30 dan Fig. D: Load stages of weighting elements Top apron cradles Fig. F: Partial load Texparts PK 1601 weighting arm can be fitted with OH 2402 or OH 554 top apron cradles. For description of top apron cradles see chapter 5, page The OH 2402 supersedes the previous cradle OH 554 and is totally compatible to this. Concerning types of top rollers and colour of distance clips (which indicates openings), existing top rollers and distance clips from Texparts can be used further on without any problems on OH 2402, too. As top aprons we recommend to use PR 3217 (gauge 75 mm) and PR 4017 (gauge 82.5 mm). Existing apron sizes with designation PR 32/5 (gauge 75 mm) and PR 40/5 (gauge 82.5 mm) respectively can be used further on with the OH 2402, if the backhang of the apron top roller can be set to 3 mm. Fig. G shows the top apron cradles, the appropriate top apron designations, the corresponding apron widths as well as the prescribed diameters of the apron top rollers. Fig. E: Load setting of weighting elements Chapter 9118 Chapter 9119
186 Top apron Gauge Top apron Top Basic equipm.* Colour cradle Tw roller apron Distance clips types [mm] OH LP PR 3217 OH LP PR 32/5 OH LP PR 4017 OH LP PR 40/5 OH LP PR 40/5 OH LP PR 40/5 * Distance clips are not included in standard OH supply. Fig. G: Top apron cradles and distance clips for PK 1601 Opening X at apron release point OLC OLC OLC black beige green The distance between the deflecting edges of the top apron cradle and the bottom apron nose bar (= opening X) determines, with a given apron thickness, the intensity of the fibre guidance and control (fig. H). The opening X is set with the aid of special distance clips that are mounted on the top apron cradle. For differentiation and easy checking of the various openings, the distance clips are made of different colours (fig. I). The opening "X" needed for a certain fibre material is mainly depending on the fibre type, the fibre mass, the kind of bottom apron nose bar and on the method and quality of the fibre preparation and the fineness of the spun yarn. Practice has shown that, in general, three distance clips are adequate for the entire range of counts handled in worsted mills (OLC , OLC , OLC ). Available OLCclips are listed in fig. I. Top roller cots In the PK 1601 weighting arm, the rear and front top rollers with newly fitted cots should have 50 mm cot diameter after first grinding. Subsequent grinding of the cots may reduce the cot diameter of rear and front top rollers by a maximum of 3 mm. Within this range it is not necessary to readjust the height of the weighting arm. The system diameter of the apron top roller is 48 mm and must be kept precisely on account of the specified apron length. Usually the top rollers are supplied without cots. If required, however, Texparts can also supply top rollers with cots fitted and ground. The cot quality can be specified by the customer. The cot diameters of top rollers with newly fitted cots are shown in fig. J on the following page. Cot grinding intervals of rear and front top rollers depend on the following: cot quality type of fibre to be processed finishing agents or other additives climatic conditions weighting pressure of top roller top roller operating time. In addition, in selecting the cot quality to suit the fibre, the cot should have accurately shaped edges, true, concentric running behaviour and a goodgrip surface. For the rear and front top rollers we recommend cots with a hardness between 80 Shore A to 85 Shore A, and for the apron top roller cots with a hardness between 75 Shore A to 80 Shore A. In the case of recessed apron top rollers, deviating fibre characteristics may require a variety of recess depths T. Ideal values must be determined by inhouse spinning trials of the spinning mill, taking the fibre masses and fibre properties into account. Recessed rollers OLC distance clip Colour Opening X in mm with OH 2402 Opening X in mm with OH black beige green pink blue The recess depth of the apron top roller has a crucial effect on the intensity of fibre guidance and fibre control. It is an important instrument for achieving optimum yarn quality. Selected recess depths that are too low can impair both yarn quality and running properties. In practice, the recess depths listed in fig. J on the following page are used. If high loads are applied, an adequate recess depth must be assured to compensate for the flattening of the cot of the apron top roller. Fig. H: Opening X Fig. I: Distance clips OLC and opening X Chapter 9120 Chapter 9121
187 Rear and front top rollers Top roller d 1 d 2 b E LP /32 34 Apron top roller as recessed roller Top roller d 1 d 2 W b K T Feed sliver count 0.5 for Frenchtype rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer LP for Frenchtype rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) LP and coarser, twisted roving approx tex (Nm 1.0) and finer 1.5 for twisted rovings of approx tex (Nm 1.0) and coarser sizes, also for fibre materials with poor draft properties Bottom apron nose bar Long bottom apron system The bottom apron nose bar supports the bottom apron as it passes the front zone. The slightly convex shape of the nose bar provides good fibre guidance and control in the main draft zone. The height of the nose bar generally is 2.5 mm above the draft plane 1 (see fig. K). In special cases a higher nose bar position (with interchangeable washer 2) up to approx. 4 mm can be provided. A lower nose bar position (bar on the same level as the draft plane) may be more favourable in the case of fibres with high fibre adhesiveness. Fig. K: Draft plane with long bottom apron system d 1 = outer ring diameter of version with cot [mm] d 2 = diameter over cot [mm] b = cot width [mm] W = apron width [mm] E = width of outer ring [mm] T = recess depth [mm] Outer ring and cot dimensions of rear and front top rollers Outer ring and cot dimensions of apron top rollers Fig. J: Top rollers with cot and outer ring dimensions for PK 1601 Chapter 9122 Chapter 9123
188 Condensers for PK 1601 Front zone condenser The front zone condenser A is fitted in the main draft zone between the apron unit and the front pair of rollers (see fig. L). The task of the condenser is to selvedge the fibre material coming from the apron unit and prevent the flank fibres from spreading out. The front zone condenser is suspended from the guide head of the front weighting element by means of a special securing spring. Care must be taken not to restrict the front zone condenser range of play, as this may lead to a drop in quality. Rear zone condenser Fig. L: Fronthang of front top roller and backhang of middle top roller and arrangement of condensers For all Texparts draft systems Survey of top roller's outer ring and cot dimensions Rear and front top rollers Weighting arm Top roller d 1 d 2 b E Cotton ring spinning machines PK 3025 PK 2025, PK 2055, PK 2130, PK 2155 PK 3035, PK 2035, PK 2065 PK 2135, PK 2165 Cotton roving frames LP ) /28 30 LP ) /28 30 The rear zone condenser B is employed in the draft system of worsted ring spinning machines (see fig. M). We recommend version KL This condenser is positioned ahead of the apron unit. Its shape is made in such a way that the roving is smoothed when it runs into the following doubleapron unit. The rear zone condenser is coupled to the rear roving guide and copies the latter s traverse motion. The task of the rear zone condenser is to ensure that the roving only passes through the apron roller pair within the recessed portion of the upper apron roller. The traverse motion must be adjusted in such a way that this condition can be fulfilled reliably. Front zone Gauge Tw Remarks Symbol condenser in [mm] Ref. No. KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum secured KL by cheesehead screw KL Front zone condenser KL Pendulum with spring KL suspension PK 5000, PK 1550, PK 1500 PK 1600 Worsted ring spinning machines LP1015 2) 19 28/ PK 6000 LP ) /32 34 PK 1601, PK 1660 LP ) / ) LP 1002 series supersedes LP 302 series top rollers. 2) LP 1014, LP 1015 supersedes LP 314, LP 315 series top rollers. d 1 = diameter of outer ring [mm] d 2 = diameter of cot [mm] b = width of cot [mm] E = width of outer ring [mm] Rear zone condenser Ref. No. KL Fig. M: Condensers for PK 1601 Chapter 9124 Chapter 9125
189 Apron top rollers Recessed apron top rollers Weighting arm Top roller d 1 d 2 b E W Cotton ring spinning machines PK 3025, PK 3035 LP ) /32 PK 2000 Series, LP 303 2) /32 PK 2100 Series LP /34 30/34 28/32 Cotton roving frames PK 1500, PK 1550 LP / PK 1600 PK 5000 LP Weighting Top d 1 d 2 b E W K T Feed arm roller material Worsted ring spinning machines PK 1601 LP Frenchtype roving PK 1660 approx. Nm 1.0 or finer PK 6000 LP approx. Nm 1.0 or coarser PK 1601 LP Twisted roving PK 1660 approx. Nm 1.0 or finer PK 6000 LP Nm 1.0 or coarser Worsted ring spinning machines PK 6000, PK1660 LP PK 1601 LP ) Texparts supplies the apron top roller LP 1003 with special sleeves as standard. If requested LP 1002 with cots can also be supplied as apron top roller. 2) Previous type with steel outer ring; replaced by LP d 1 = diameter of outer ring [mm] d 2 = diameter of outer ring, sleeve or cot [mm] (see illustr.) b = width of cot [mm] E = width of outer ring or sleeve [mm] W = width of apron [mm] E d 1 = diameter of outer ring [mm] d 2 = diameter of cot [mm] b = width of cot [mm] E = width of outer ring or sleeve [mm] W = width of apron [mm] K = width of recess [mm] T = depth of recess [mm] LP 1015, 1016, 1017 Chapter 9126 Chapter 9127
190 Bottom roller bearings CONVERSIONPlus Application Texparts bottom roller bearings are being installed in ring spinning machines, draw frames and roving frames. These Texparts bearing units are fitted with precisionmade needle bearings with a highloadbearing capacity. The two lateral flanges of the inner ring have a knurled surface and provide effective protection against the intrusion of fibres. The parted glassfibre reinforced synthetic cage with the cage ends connected by a fitting groove ensures running characteristics like those of a solid cage. Fixing of the outer ring in the roller stand can be carried out as standard by means of a fixing cap with either centreguide or side lugs. Texparts bottom roller bearings are being supplied readygreased with Texparts grease TG 5, or ungreased on customers demand. Details for relubrication (see chapter 8, page 4). CONVERSIONPlus is the futureoriented Texparts concept for the modernization of ring spinning machines. It comprises individual modules, which can be selected and combined to fulfill the various application requirements. In principle CONVERSIONPlus was conceived for the modernization of the spindle and draft system areas. The installation of a modern draft system with higher drafts and a better draft accuracy, combined with the utilization of highly efficient high speed spindles, will offer decisive advantages to the spinning mill: improvement of the yarn quality increase of spindle speed and production output reduction of energy consumption. An additional advantage of the CONVERSIONPlus principle is the fact that for the modernization of ring spinning machines no constructional changes of the existing building conditions on site are required. The machine inside of the spinning hall does not have to be moved during modernization. With CONVERSIONPlus machines are modernized successively, which means that there will be very little interference with the production running on other machines in the spinning hall. Bottom roller bearing with central guidance Bottom roller bearing with lateral guidance Chapter 9128 Chapter 9129
191 Modernization of ring spinning machines 1. The modernization of the spindle sector The modernization of ring spinning machines consists of 2 individual building blocks: 1. the modernization of the spindle sector 2. the modernization of the draft sector The employment of flexibly tensioning and adjustable spindles with small wharve diameters makes higher spindle speeds possible without increasing the rotation speed of the frame's main drive shaft (thus saving energy). The lowvibration running and excellent damping properties of Texparts spindles also have a positive influence on the ends down rate. The installation of new, highquality spinning rings enables the top speeds made possible by Texparts spindles to be exploited to the full. A considerable saving in maintenance can also be achieved by the fact that these rings can be centred on the spindle. draft sector 2. The modernization of the draft sector Renewing the draft equipment within the framework of the modernization of a ring spinning machine is of prime importance in improving yarn quality. The following options exist: spindle sector fitting new parts to the weighting arms (i.e. exchanging top apron cradles, rear and front top rollers) installing new weighting arms renewing the fluted rollers (rear and front bottom rollers) replacing the knurled rollers (bottom apron rollers). The installation of a new Texparts draft system on doubleapron basis guarantees optimal draft conditions. After modernization the system has an ideal draft distribution and guarantees individually adjustable loading for reliable fibre guidance and nip. Texparts draft system ensure perfect fibre control and therefore excellent yarn quality in terms of evenness strength and count variation. Another design feature of the Texparts loading system is the precise parallel positioning of top rollers on top of the bottom rollers. Texparts weighting arms are characterized by constant loading and minimum tolerances, thus making costly and timeconsuming readjustment work unnecessary. Chapter 9130 Chapter 9131
192
193 Texparts Technical Information 10 Textile terms General technical terms Chapter 101
194 Fineness designation of fibres, yarns and strands Finenessrelated maximum tensile strength Chapter 102 Chapter 103
195 Fineness designation of fibres, slivers and yarns Formulae for calculations Chapter 104 Chapter 105
196 Fineness designations of plyyarns Chapter 106 Chapter 107
197 Formulae 1) for mill machine calculations Chapter 108 Chapter 109
198 Chapter 1010 Chapter 1011
199 Additions of regain for fibres and filaments 1) Chapter 1012 Chapter 1013
200 Further practical formulae Yarn twist Chapter 1014 Chapter 1015
201 Grades and Staple Length of Cottons from various Growths USA White Light Spotted Tinged Yellow spotted Stained GOOD MIDDLING 11* STRICT MIDDLING 21* 22 23* MIDDLING 31* 32 33* 34* 35 STRICT LOW MIDDLING 41* 42 43* 44* LOW MIDDLING 51* 52 53* 54* STRICT GOOD ORDINARY 61* 62 63* GOOD ORDINARY 71* BELOW GRADE *physical Standards, all others on description Growing areas: Southeast: Alabama, Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia About 10% of the US crop, mainly for local consumption. Average staple length 1.1/16 inch CENTRAL ASIA (Uzbekistan, Turkmenia, Azerbaijan, Kazakhstan, Kirghizstan) Uzbekistan Standards: BIRINCHI (1st Sort.) OLIY YAKSHI URTA ODDIY IFLOS IKINCHI (2nd Sort.) OLIY YAKSHI URTA ODDIY IFLOS UCHINCHI (3rd Sort.) YAKSHI URTA ODDIY IFLOS TURTINCHI (4th Sort.) YAKSHI URTA ODDIY IFLOS BESHINCHI (5th Sort.) URTA ODDIY IFLOS The sorts are subdivided into classes according to trash content: (OLIY [highest] = lowest trash content, IFLOS [leafy] = highest trash content). Staple length for upland styles: 1.1/32" 1.5/32"; Extra Long Staple upto 1.7/16". TURKMENIA Standards 1 to 6 comparable with old USSR standards (Pervyi, Vtoroi etc.). Staple length: 1.1/16" 1.5/32" and Extra Long Staple up to 1.7/16". SUDAN MidSouth: Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, Tennessee About 35% of total production, main share for local consumption. Average staple length over 1.1/16". Southwest: Kansas, Oklahoma, Texas About 30% of total production whereof ample 50% are exported. Average staple length below 1.1/16". West: Arizona, Californla, New Mexico About 25% of total production, mainly for export. Average staple length over 1.1/8". American Pima is grown in Arizona, California, New Mexico, Texas and Mississippi. Length: 1.3/8" 1.1/2", Micronaire , strength 3638 g/tex. Extra Long Staple: BARAKAT 1.3/8" 1.9/16" Gezira and Tokar region Medium to Long Staple: SHAMBAT (B) 1.1/4" 1.3/8" Gezira region Medium Staple: Acala 1.1/32" 1.1/8" Gezira, Rahad, Girba and White Nile region Short Staple: Nuba Mountains 1" 1.1/16" Chapter 1016 Chapter 1017 EGYPT Extra Long Staple Varieties: Long Staple Varieties:Staple Vari GIZA 45 (1.13/32" 1.7/16") GIZA 75 (1.3/16" 1.1/4") GIZA 76 (1.3/8" 1.7/16") DANDARA (1.5/32" 1.7/32") GIZA 70 (1.3/8" 1.7/16") GIZA 80 (1.3/16" 1.1/4") GIZA 77 (1.11/32" 1.3/8"), GIZA 85 (1.3/15" 1.7/32") GIZA 84 GIZA 83 (1.5/32" 1.1/4") GIZA 81 The above varieties are exported to practically the whole world, with the exception of GIZA 80, DANDARA, GIZA 85, and GIZA 83 which are reserved for local consumption. Egyptian cotton is sold on basis of private types and it is completely forbidden to sell on specification like other growths. Grades from EXTRA down to FAIR, standards deposited in Alexandria. PARAGUAY Grado 1 to Grado 7 grades comparable with US, partly slightly spotted.staple length: 1.3/32" 1.5/32".
202 Spinning limits for cotton and wool PERU Tanguis staple 1.1/8" to 1.3/16" Micronaire PIMA staple 1.1/2" to 1.5/ 8" Micronaire Del Cerro staple 1.5/16" to 1.7/16" Micronaire Aspero staple 1.1/32" to 1.3/32" Micronaire Ivory Coast Traded on private types; grades comparable with US; colour: silky bloomy yellowish to light spotted. Staple length: 1.1/16" to 1.5/32". Conversion Table of Staple lengths Inch mm mm (mathematical (GOST value) specification) 7/ 8" /25 29/32" /26 15/16" /27 31/32" /28 1" /29 1 1/32" /31 1 1/16" /32 1 3/32" /33 1 1/ 8" /34 1 5/32" /35 1 3/16" /36 1 7/32" /37 1 1/ 4" /37 1 9/32" /38 1 5/16" /39 1 3/ 8" /40 1 7/16" /41 1 1/ 2" /42 Published with kind permission of the "Bremen Cotton Exchange". We would like to thank Mr. Neumann of the "Bremen Cotton Exchange" for his kind assistance. Chapter 1018 Chapter 1019
203 Classification system for wool Chapter 1020 Chapter 1021
204 Traveller speeds in m/s Chapter 1022 Chapter 1023
205 Shapes and types of ring travellers To process the wide range of yarn qualities or to suit the various traveller speeds, a variety of traveller types are employed,e.g. Traveller Flange Wire Traveller No. ISO No. Surface shape No. profile type (mg per pc.) treatment EL 1 hf 10/0 20 SuperSpeed EL 1 hd EM 4/ CERADUR C 1 hr TW 1/0 50 BlackSpeed C 1 hf KM 6/0KN 32.2 SuperSpeed C 2 hd TM 2 71 CERANIT C 2 rf MT SuperSpeed Some traveller shapes are manufactured in the following wire profiles: Shape Shape Cshaped travellers deepbow Cshaped travellers Type (basic) W T TM TW EM KM EMT MT KS MTW Traveller Designation Wire Profile f hr hd hf rhr rf r No Ring Flange (to DIN ISO 96) Width mm No Width mm r hr hf hd f rf (round) (halfround) (halfroundflat) (halfround wide) (flat) (roundflat) The various shapes are required to achieve uniform yarn quality with every type of yarn, or to enable spinning to be done at maximum speeds. Travellers made of round wire (r) are preferred where longstaple and sensitive synthetic yarns require travellers that permit particulary smooth yarn travel. Travellers made of halfround wire (hr,hd, hf) are preferred for processing shortstaple yarns at top speeds. Flat wire travellers (f) are used when yarns of minimum hairiness are required, e.g. in the case of combed cotton. Round / flat wire travellers (rf, rhr) have round wire at the point where the thread runs through the traveller and are flat on the ringframe side. They are used for pure synthetics, particularly acrylic fibres. Traveller shapes deviating from the standard type of C or EL travellers are given descriptive additional designations such as: Elliptical travellers Half elliptical travellers (basic) TW W EM H HW HWW (basic) EMT T = low shape (e.g. C 2 hr Type T) H = high shape (e.g. EL 2 hr Type H) MT = medium low shape W = wide shape (e.g. EL 1 hd Type W) (e.g. C 2 f Type MT) Combinations of additional designations can occur, such as: Type HW = high and wide shape (e.g. EL 1 hr Type HW) Type EMT = narrow and mediumdeep shape (e.g. C 1 hr Type EMT) Wire Profile: r = round; rf = round/flat rhr = round/halfround hr = halfround; hd = halfround, wide hf = halfround, special wide f = flat Section on ring travellers by kind permission and with the assistance of Messrs. Reiners + Fürst GmbH u. Co.KG, P.O. Box , Mönchengladbach/Germany Chapter 1024 Chapter 1025
206 The most usual types of ring travellers for selflubricating HZ rings The most usual types of ring travellers for selflubricating J rings Shape HZ steel travellers Basic type Basic type Type H Type A Type ExpressA Ring height 6.35 mm (1/4 ) 9.5 mm (3/8 ) Type Express Type Express ASK HZ nylon travellers Type B Nylon Steel 10.3 mm (13/32 ) 11.1 mm (7/16 ) 16.7 mm (21/32 ) 25.4 mm (1 ) 38.1 mm (1 1 / 2 ) Designation HZ 6.3 HZ 9.5 HZ 10.3 HZ 11.1 HZ 16.7 HZ 25.4 HZ 38.1 (Basic) nylon sup.nyl. steel nylon sup.nyl. steel nylon sup.nyl. nyl.steel nylon sup.nyl. nyl.steel steel nylon sup.nyl. nyl.steel nylon sup.nyl. nyl.steel nylon sup.nyl. nyl.steel Types A B H Expr. Expr. Expr. A ASK Material steel steel nyl. nyl. s.nyl. s.nyl. nyl. nyl. nyl. s.nyl. s.nyl. nyl. nyl. s.nyl. s.nyl. steel steel steel steel steel steel steel Shape J steel travellers Basic type Basic type Type A Type ExpressA Type B Type B Type BB J nylon travellers supernylon Nylon Steel Ring height 9.1 mm (23/64 ) 11.1 mm (7/16 ) 17.4 mm (11/16 ) Designation J 9.1 J 11.1 J 17.4 (Basic) steel nylon supernylon steel nylon steel nylon supernylon nylonsteel supernylon Types A B BB Material nylonsteel = nylon travellers with steel insert in the thread passage nylonsteel = nylon travellers with steel insert in the thread passage supernylon = glassfibre reinforced nylon travellers supernylon = glassfibre reinforced nylon travellers Examples: HZ 9.5 r type Express steel Examples: J 9.1 r steel HZ 16.7 supernylon type B J 11.1 supernylon HZ 25.4 nylonsteel Chapter 1026 Chapter 1027 steel steel steel steel nylon steel nylon supernylon steel Expr. A steel
207 Traveller Numbers for Cotton Spinning Humidity and temperature HighSpeed ring spinning machine Conventional Spinning Compact Spinning Travellers made of flat wire halfround halfround profile wire profile wire profile f hr hr hf hf Yarn Count hd hd Probable Traveller Number /0 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/0 4/0 5/0 5/0 6/0 5/0 6/0 6/0 7/0 7/0 8/0 8/0 9/0 8/0 9/0 9/0 10/0 10/0 11/0 12/0 14/0 14/0 16/0 17/0 19/0 18/0 20/0 18/0 20/0 20/0 22/ /0 1 2/0 3/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/0 4/0 5/0 5/0 6/0 6/0 7/0 7/0 8/0 7/0 8/0 8/0 9/0 9/0 10/0 11/0 12/0 13/0 15/0 15/0 17/0 16/0 18/0 16/0 18/0 18/0 20/ /0 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/0 4/0 5/0 5/0 6/0 5/0 6/0 6/0 7/0 8/0 9/0 9/0 10/0 9/0 10/0 10/0 11/0 11/0 12/0 13/0 14/0 15/0 16/0 17/0 19/0 18/0 20/0 18/0 20/0 22/0 24/ flat wire profile f Ne C tex Nm /0 1/ /0 2/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/ Standard Ring spinning machine Cotton, Rayon Staple, Polyester, Blends Probable Traveller Number /0 6/0 6/0 7/0 7/0 8/0 8/0 9/0 9/0 10/0 12/0 14/0 15/0 17/0 16/0 18/0 16/0 18/0 18/0 20/ /0 1 1/0 1 1/0 2/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/0 5/0 6/0 6/0 7/0 7/0 8/0 8/0 9/0 10/0 12/0 13/0 15/0 14/0 16/0 15/0 17/0 16/0 18/0 Acrylics Core Yarns halfround halfround halfround wire profile wire profile wire profile hr hf hd hr rf hr rf /0 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 5/0 5/0 6/0 7/0 8/0 8/0 9/0 10/0 12/0 Chapter 1028 Chapter 1029
208 The h,x diagram for determining air conditioning factors Chapter 1030 Chapter 1031
209 Britishmetric units conversion table Millimeter into inches 1) and inches into millimetres Conversion table Chapter 1032 Chapter 1033
210 Millimeter into inches 1) and inches into millimetres Conversion table Inches into millimetres Conversion table Chapter 1034 Chapter 1035
211 Inches into millimetres Conversion table Introduction of international SI units Chapter 1036 Chapter 1037
212 Conversion of units no longer to be used Chapter 1038 Chapter 1039
213
214 Worldwide Sales Network 11 Sales Companies and Representatives Chapter 111
215 Worldwide Business Manufacturing & sales facilities Sales offices Oerlikon Textile Components has a dense worldwide network of agents and representatives. This ensures that our sales representatives speak the language of our customers and can be on site on short notice wherever a problem exists. You will find the current survey of the Oerlikon Textile Components representatives in each country on the website: Chapter 112
216 Texparts Products 12 Complete list of Product Reference Numbers Chapter 121
217 Texparts Product Reference Numbers according to ascending Reference Number Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Distance gauge Chapter 5 99, Lubricating nozzle Chapter Lubricating nozzle Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Oil Isoflex PDP 65 Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubrication adapter Chapter Lubricating nozzle Chapter Slide calipers Chapter 5 99, , Texparts grease TG2 Chapter Texparts grease TG 5 Chapter Isoflex Oil Super LDS 18 Chapter Lubricating nozzle Chapter Lubricating nozzle Chapter Grease gun size 2 Chapter 3 14 Chapter Grease gun size 3 Chapter 3 14 Chapter Allen key (key 5) Chapter 5 101,102, Allen key (key 4) Chapter 5 98, 103, Spanner Chapter 5 101, Height setting gauge Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Pin Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Screwdriver Chapter 5 101, Height setting gauge Chapter 5 101, Draft field gauge Chapter Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ratchet Chapter 5 98, 99, , 102, 103, Screwdriver bit SW 6 Chapter 5 99, , Screwdriver bit SW 5 Chapter 5 99, 100, Screwdriver Chapter 5 99, Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Setting wrench Chapter 5 99, 100, 101 Chapter 9 34, Lubricating adapter Chapter Front clearer roller 82.5 Chapter 5 6,10,14; Front clearer roller 75 Chapter 5 6,10,14, Socket screwdriver Chapter 5 99, 100 Chapter Lubricating device Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Front clearer roller 68.4 Chapter 5 6,10,14, Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubricating nozzle Chapter Front clearer roller 82,5 Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Spindle lubricating apparatus Chapter 1 14 Chapter Pliers for cover Chapter 5 98, 103, Screwdriver SW 6 Chapter 5 103, Spanner Chapter 5 98, 103, Allen key (key 3) Chapter Pliers Chapter 5 103, Lubricating adapter Chapter Lubricating adapter Chapter LConnector Chapter 5 105, Locking ring Chapter Connecting piece Chapter Front clearer roller holder Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter End piece Chapter TConnector Chapter 5 105, Torque wrench Chapter 5 98, 103, Front clearer roller 68.4 Chapter Front clearer roller 75 Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter 5 98 Chapter 122 Chapter 123
218 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Middle guide element Chapter 5 2 Chapter Ballscrewdriver Chapter Height setting gauge Chapter Height setting gauge Chapter 5 103, Lubricating adapter Chapter Pneumatic unit Chapter Pneumatic unit Chapter Pneumatic unit Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Lubrication adapter Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Tube cutter Chapter 5 98, 103, Height control gauge Chapter Height control gauge Chapter 5 103, Torque wrench Chapter 5 98, 103, Draft field gauge Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Height setting gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter A ADZ Distance piece Chapter 2 3 AR Contact roll assembly 70 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assembly 75 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assembly 82,5 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assemby 75 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assembly 82,5 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assembly 82.5 Chapter 2 4 AR Contact roll assemblies Chapter 8 2 AR Contact roll assemblies Chapter 8 2 AR Contact roll assemblies Chapter 8 2 AR Contact roll assembly 75 Chapter 9 16 AR Contact roll assembly 75 Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 70 Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 70 left Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 75 left Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 70 right Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 75 right Chapter 2 6 AR Contact roll assembly 90 Chapter 2 2 AR Contact roll assembly 75 Chapter 2 2 AR Contact roll assembly 70 Chapter 2 2 AR Contact roll assembly 82,5 Chapter 2 2 C CHT Bracket for counter roll Chapter 7 4 CK Bearing unit Chapter 2 12 CK Bearing unit Chapter 7 12 Chapter 8 8 CK Drawoff roller Chapter 2 22 CK Counter roll Chapter 7 4, 5 CK Counter roll Chapter 7 4 CK Counter roll Chapter 7 6 CK Draw off roller with cot Chapter 2 22 CK Draw off roller Chapter 2 22 CR Bearing unit Chapter 2 18 CS Spindle bearing unit Chapter 8 5 CS1 Spindle units CS1 Chapter 1 2 CS1 12 Spindle Units CS1 Chapter 1 4 CWL Wharve Chapter 7 5 D DR Bearing unit Chapter 2 20 DR Bearing unit Chapter 2 20 DR Bearing unit Chapter 2 20 DR Bearing unit Chapter 8 3 DR Bearing unit Chapter 2 20 DR Bearing unit Chapter 2 20 Chapter 124 Chapter 125
219 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page E EB Elastic bush Chapter 6 2 F FKA Protecting cap Chapter 7 4 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 8, 9 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 8, 9 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 9 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 9 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 7 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 7 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 7 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 7 FL False twist bearing unit Chapter 7 2 FMT Nut Chapter 7 4 FR Bearing unit Chapter 2 14 H HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 8 5 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HF Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 6 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 8 6 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 HZ Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 8 I IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 IL Bearing unit Chapter 6 10 K KL Rear roving guide Chapter 5 90 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 94 Chapter9 102,113, 124 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 KL Front zone condenser 82.5 Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9102, 113,124 KL Front zone condenser 75 Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9102, 113,124 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 113, 124 KL Front zone condenser 75 Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9102, 113,124 KL Front zone condenser 82.5 Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 102, 113,124 KL Front zone condenser Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 113, 124 L LE Beater spindle Chapter 6 8 LE Beater spindle Chapter 6 6 LE Beater spindle with wharve Chapter 6 6 LE Beater spindle with wharve Chapter 6 8 LE Beater spindle with wharve Chapter 6 8 LE Beater spindle with wharve Chapter 6 8 LP Top rollers Chapter 8 4 LP Top roller 100 Chapter 3 2 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4, 8, 12, 16 LP Top rolller 82.5 Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 4, 16, 20 Chapter 126 Chapter 127
220 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page LP Top roller 68.4 Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 82.5 Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 4, 16, 20 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 16, 20 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 68.4 Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 82.5 Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 4 LP Top roller 100 Chapter 3 5 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 46, 50, 54 Chapter 9 97 LP Top roller 82.5 Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 46, 50, 54 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 50, 54 LP Top roller 100 Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 LP Top roller 110 Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 LP Top roller 130 Chapter 3 6 LP Top roller 82.5 Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 46 Chapter 9 97 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 6 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Chapter 9 109, 120 LP Top roller 100 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88, 109, 120 LP Top roller 110 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88 LP Top roller 130 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88 LP Top roller 82.5 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Chapter 9 109, 120 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Chapter 9 109, 120 LP Top roller 80 Chapter 3 9 LP Top roller 70 Chapter 3 9 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 9 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 9 LP Top roller 75 Chapter 3 8 LP Top roller 70 Chapter 3 8 LP Top roller 80 Chapter 3 8 LP Top roller 90 Chapter 3 8 LPDE End cover Chapter 3 2,4,5,6,7,8 O OH Top apron cradle 68.4 Chapter 5 8,16,20,66 Chapter 9 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 16, 20, 66 Chapter 9 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 16, 20, 66 Chapter 9 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 4, 64 Chapter 9 25 OH Top apron cradle 68.4 Chapter 5 4, 8, 64 Chapter 9 25 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 4, 64 Chapter 9 25 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 Chapter 9 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 68.4 Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 68.4 Chapter 5 4,8,16,20,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 82,5 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 68.4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,60 Chapter 9 25,37,51,66 Chapter 128 Chapter 129
221 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,60 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 50, 54, 80 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 50, 54, 80 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 36,68 Chapter 9 77 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 36,68 Chapter 9 77 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 72 Chapter 9 66, 77 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 70 OH Top apron cradle 100 Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 130 Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 78 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 40, 78 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 26 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 76 Chapter 9 34, 66, 77 OH Top apron cradle 100 Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 110 Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 130 Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 OH Top apron cradle 90 Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 OH Top apron cradle 75 Chapter 5 46, 84 OH Top apron cradle 82.5 Chapter 5 46, 84 OH Top apron cradle 90 Chapter 5 16, 20, 58 Chapter 9 37, 51 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52,97 98, 109, 120 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52,97 98, 109, 120 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 98, 109, 120 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 65, 67, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 57,59, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 87 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 27,29,79, 97 Chapter 9 66,69,77,88 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 87 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 27,29,69,97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 88 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76, 87 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 27,29,69,97 Chapter 9 66, 76, 88 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 61, 63, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 57,59,61,63,65,96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 57,59,61,63,65,96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Chapter 1210 Chapter 1211
222 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52 97,98,109,120 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96, 98 Chapter 9 109, 120 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 26, 38, 52 OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 26, 38, 52 OLC Distance clip Chapter 9 26,38,52, OLC Distance clip Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 26, 38, 52 P PEL Front guide element Chapter PEL Middle guide element Chapter PEL Rear guide element Chapter PEL Front guide element Chapter 9 75, 85 PEL Front guide element Chapter PEL Middle guide element Chapter PEL Rear guide element Chapter 9 75, 85 PEL Front guide element Chapter 9 75, 85, 107 PEL Rear guide element Chapter 9 75, 85 PEL Middle guide element Chapter 9 75, 85 PFE Clearer roller holder Chapter 5 7,11,15,19 PFE Clearer roller holder Chapter 5 33,39,49,53 PFE Spring Chapter 5 92 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 38, 42 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 38,40 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 38,40 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 32,36 Chapter 9 70, 73 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 32, 34 Chapter 9 70, 73, 75 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 32, 34 Chapter 9 70, 73, 75 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 52, 54 Chapter 9 114, 117 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 48, 50 Chapter 9 103, 106 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 14,16 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 14, 16 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 18, 20 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 18, 20 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 6,9 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 6, 9 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 10, 12, 13 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 10, 12, 13 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 2,4 Chapter 9 19, 21, 22 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 2, 4 Chapter 9 19, 21, 22 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 22, 26, 27 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 24, 28, 30 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 25, 30 Chapter 9 57,59,60,64 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 22, 26, 27 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 24, 28 Chapter 9 57, 58,60,65 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 25, 30 Chapter 9 57, 59,60,64 PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 44,46 Chapter 9 92, 94 Chapter 1212 Chapter 1213
223 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page PK Weighting arm Chapter 5 52 Chapter 9 114, 117 PKHA Clearer roller holder Chapter 5 45 PKPW Mono clearer roller Chapter 5 45 PPH Lateral clearer roller holder Chapter 5 39 PR Top apron Chapter 5 46 Chapter 9 97 PR Top apron Chapter 5 46 Chapter 9 97 PR Top apron Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 4,16,20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 16, 20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 50, 54 PR Top apron Chapter 5 16, 20 PR Top apron Chapter 5 50, 54 PR Top apron Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 40,42 PR Top apron Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 40 PR Top apron Chapter 5 26, 34, 40 PR Top apron Chapter 5 50, 54 PR Top apron Chapter 5 50, 54 Profile P1 Bottom apron nose bar P1 Chapter 5 86 Profile P2 Bottom apron nose bar P2 Chapter 5 86 Profile P3 Bottom apron nose bar P3 Chapter 5 86 S SMM Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 10 SMM Spindle bearing unit Chapter 1 10 SMM32 Spindle bearing unit Chapter 8 12 SMM42 Spindle bearing unit Chapter 8 12 SMT Nut Chapter 2 13 SR Bearing unit Chapter 8 3 SR Bearing unit Chapter 8 3 SR Bearing unit Chapter 2 16 SR Bearing unit Chapter 2 16 SR Bearing unit Chapter 8 3 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Bearing unit Chapter 2 16 SR Bearing unit Chapter 2 16 SR Tension pulley Chapter 2 12 Chapter 8 2 SR Tension pulley Chapter 2 12 Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Bearing unit Chapter 2 16 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tension pulley Chapter 2 12 Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tension pulley Chapter 2 10 SR Tension pulley Chapter 2 10 Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 SR Tape tension pulley Chapter 8 2 T TE Rotor spindle Chapter 6 2 TL Rotor spindle Chapter 6 2 Chapter 8 9 TL Rotor spindle Chapter 6 4 U UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UCL Locating clip Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearings Chapter 8 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 Chapter 1214 Chapter 1215
224 Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page Ref. No. Designation Chapter Page UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 8 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 8 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 8 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 2 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 4 UL Bottom roller bearing Chapter 4 6 V VDE Plastic cover Chapter 7 14 VDE Plastic cover Chapter 7 14 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 12 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 7 10 Chapter 8 8 VR Separator roll Chapter 8 8 Z ZB Bearing unit Chapter 2 8 Chapter 6 12 ZL Bearing unit Chapter 2 8 ZL Bearing unit Chapter 2 18 ZL Bearing unit Chapter 2 18 ZL Bearing unit Chapter 6 13 ZL Draw off roller with cot Chapter 2 22 ZL Draw off roller with cot Chapter 2 22 ZL Drawoff roller Chapter 2 22 Chapter 1216 Chapter 1217
225 Texparts Product Reference Numbers Products in alphabetic order Designation Ref. No Chapter Page A Allen key (key 5) Chapter 5 101,102,103 Allen key (key 4) Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 Allen key (key 3) Chapter 5 98 B Ballscrewdriver Chapter 5 98 Bearing unit CK Chapter 2 12 Bearing unit CK Chapter 7 12 Bearing unit CK Chapter 8 8 Bearing unit CK Chapter 8 8 Bearing unit CR Chapter 2 18 Bearing unit DR Chapter 2 20 Bearing unit DR Chapter 2 20 Bearing unit DR Chapter 2 20 Bearing unit DR Chapter 8 3 Bearing unit DR Chapter 2 20 Bearing unit DR Chapter 2 20 Bearing unit FR Chapter 2 14 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit IL Chapter 6 10 Bearing unit SR Chapter 8 3 Bearing unit SR Chapter 8 3 Bearing unit SR Chapter 2 16 Bearing unit SR Chapter 2 16 Bearing unit SR Chapter 8 3 Bearing unit SR Chapter 2 16 Bearing unit SR Chapter 2 16 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Bearing unit SR Chapter 2 16 Bearing unit ZB Chapter 2 8 Bearing unit ZB Chapter 6 12 Bearing unit ZL Chapter 2 8 Bearing unit ZL Chapter 2 18 Bearing unit ZL Chapter 2 18 Bearing unit ZL Chapter 6 13 Beater spindle LE Chapter 6 8 Beater spindle LE Chapter 6 6 Beater spindle with wharve LE Chapter 6 6 Beater spindle with wharve LE Chapter 6 8 Beater spindle with wharve LE Chapter 6 8 Beater spindle with wharve LE Chapter 6 8 Bottom apron nose bar P1 Profile P1 Chapter 5 86 Bottom apron nose bar P2 Profile P2 Chapter 5 86 Bottom apron nose bar P3 Profile P3 Chapter 5 86 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 8 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 8 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 8 Chapter 1218 Chapter 1219
226 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 2 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 4 Bottom roller bearing UL Chapter 4 6 Bottom roller bearings UL Chapter 8 4 Bracket for counter roll CHT Chapter 7 4 C Clearer roller holder PFE Chapter 5 7,11,15,19 Clearer roller holder PFE Chapter 5 33,39,49,53 Clearer roller holder PKHA Chapter 5 45 Connecting piece Chapter Contact roll assemblies AR Chapter 8 2 Contact roll assemblies AR Chapter 8 2 Contact roll assemblies AR Chapter 8 2 Contact roll assembly 70 AR Chapter 2 4 Contact roll assembly 70 AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 70 AR Chapter 2 2 Contact roll assembly 70 left AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 70 right AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 75 AR Chapter 2 4 Contact roll assembly 75 AR Chapter 9 16 Contact roll assembly 75 AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 75 AR Chapter 2 2 Contact roll assembly 75 left AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 75 right AR Chapter 2 6 Contact roll assembly 82,5 AR Chapter 2 4 Contact roll assembly 82,5 AR Chapter 2 4 Contact roll assembly 82,5 AR Chapter 2 2 Contact roll assembly 82.5 AR Chapter 2 4 Contact roll assembly 90 AR Chapter 2 2 Contact roll assemby 75 AR Chapter 2 4 Counter roll CK Chapter 7 4 Counter roll CK Chapter 7 6 D Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52,97,98, 109, 120 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52,97,98, 109, 120 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 98, 109, 120 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 5,13,17,21,65, 67, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 57,59, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 87 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 27,29,79, 97 Chapter 9 66,69,77,88 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 87 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 27,29,69,97 Chapter 9 66, 77, 88 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76, 87 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 27,29,69,97 Chapter 9 66, 76, 88 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 97 Chapter 9 66, 76 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 5,13,17,21,61 63, 96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Counter roll CK Chapter 7 4,5 Chapter 1220 Chapter 1221
227 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 5,13,17,21, 57,59,61,63,65,96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 5,13,17,21 57,59,61,63,65,96 Chapter 9 25,26,37,51 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 81,83,85,96 Chapter 9 26,38,52,97 98,109,120 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96, 98 Chapter 9 109, 120 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 26, 38, 52 Distance clip OLC Chapter 9 26,38,52,96,109 Distance clip OLC Chapter 5 96 Chapter 9 26, 38, 52 Distance gauge Chapter 5 99, 100 Distance piece ADZ Chapter 2 3 Draft field gauge Chapter 5 99 Draft field gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter 5 98 Draft field gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Draft field gauge Chapter Draw off roller CK Chapter 2 22 Draw off roller with cot CK Chapter 2 22 Draw off roller with cot ZL Chapter 2 22 Draw off roller with cot ZL Chapter 2 22 Drawoff roller CK Chapter 2 22 Drawoff roller ZL Chapter 2 22 E Elastic bush EB Chapter 6 2 End cover LPDE Chapter 3 2,4,5,6,7,8 End piece Chapter F False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 8, 9 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 8,9 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 9 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 9 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 7 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 7 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 7 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 7 False twist bearing unit FL Chapter 7 2 Front clearer roller Chapter 5 6,10,14,18 Front clearer roller Chapter 5 3 Front clearer roller Chapter 5 6,10,14,18 Front clearer roller Chapter 5 3 Front clearer roller 82, Chapter 5 3 Front clearer roller Chapter 5 6,10,14,18 Front clearer roller holder Chapter 5 3 Front guide element PEL Chapter Front guide element PEL Chapter 9 75, 85 Front guide element PEL Chapter Front guide element PEL Chapter 9 75, 85, 107 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 94 Chapter 9 102,113, 124 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 90 Chapter 9 69, 80, 91 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 113, 124 Front zone condenser KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 113, 124 Front zone condenser 75 KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 102, 113,124 Front zone condenser 75 KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 102, 113,124 Front zone condenser 82.5 KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 102, 113,124 Front zone condenser 82.5 KL Chapter 5 92 Chapter 9 102, 113,124 Chapter 1222 Chapter 1223
228 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page G Grease gun size Chapter 3 14 Chapter 4 10 Grease gun size Chapter 3 14 H Chapter 4 10 Height control gauge Chapter 5 103, 104 Height control gauge Chapter 5 98 Height setting gauge Chapter 5 99 Height setting gauge Chapter 5 101, 102 Height setting gauge Chapter 5 98 Height setting gauge Chapter 5 103, 104 Height setting gauge Chapter I Isoflex Oil Super LDS Chapter 8 8 L Lateral clearer roller holder PPH Chapter 5 39 LConnector Chapter 5 105, 106 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locating clip UCL Chapter 4 6 Locking ring Chapter 1 5 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 4 10 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 4 10 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 4 10 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 3 14 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 4 10 Lubricating nozzle Chapter 4 10 Lubrication adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubrication adapter Chapter 1 15 M Middle guide element Chapter 5 2 Chapter 9 19 Middle guide element PEL Chapter Middle guide element PEL Chapter Middle guide element PEL Chapter 9 75, 85 Mono clearer roller PKPW Chapter 5 45 N Nut FMT Chapter 7 4 Nut SMT Chapter 2 13 O Oil Isoflex PDP Chapter 8 9 P Pin Chapter 7 14 Plastic cover VDE Chapter 7 14 Plastic cover VDE Chapter 7 14 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating adapter Chapter 1 15 Lubricating device Chapter 7 14 Pliers Chapter 5 103, 104 Pliers for cover Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 Pneumatic unit Chapter Pneumatic unit Chapter Pneumatic unit Chapter Protecting cap FKA Chapter 7 4 R Ratchet Chapter 5 98, 99, , 102, 103, 104 Rear guide element PEL Chapter Rear guide element PEL Chapter 9 75, 85 Chapter 1224 Chapter 1225
229 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Rear guide element PEL Chapter 9 75, 85 Rear roving guide KL Chapter 5 90 Rotor spindle TE Chapter 6 2 Rotor spindle TL Chapter 6 2 Rotor spindle TL Chapter 8 9 Rotor spindle TL Chapter 6 4 S Screwdriver Chapter 5 99, 100 Screwdriver Chapter 5 101, 102 Screwdriver bit SW Chapter 5 99, 100, 102 Screwdriver bit SW Chapter 5 99, 100, 102 Screwdriver SW Chapter 5 103, 104 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 12 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 7 10 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Separator roll VR Chapter 8 8 Setting wrench Chapter 5 99, 100, 101 Setting wrench Chapter 9 34, 48 Slide calipers Chapter 5 99, 100,101,102 Socket screwdriver Chapter 5 99, 100 Socket screwdriver Chapter 9 36 Spanner Chapter 5 101, 102 Spanner Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 Spindle bearing unit CS Chapter 8 5 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 8 5 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HF Chapter 1 6 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 8 6 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit HZ Chapter 1 8 Spindle bearing unit SMM Chapter 1 10 Spindle bearing unit SMM Chapter 1 10 Spindle bearing unit SMM32 Chapter 8 12 Spindle bearing unit SMM42 Chapter 8 12 Spindle lubricating apparatus Chapter 1 14 Spindle lubricating apparatus Chapter 8 10 Spindle units CS1 CS1 Chapter 1 2 Spindle Units CS1 CS1 12 Chapter 1 4 Spring PFE Chapter 5 92 T Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Chapter 1226 Chapter 1227
230 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Tape tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 TConnector Chapter 5 105, 106 Tension pulley SR Chapter 2 12 Tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tension pulley SR Chapter 2 12 Tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tension pulley SR Chapter 2 12 Tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Tension pulley SR Chapter 2 10 Tension pulley SR Chapter 2 10 Tension pulley SR Chapter 8 2 Texparts grease TG Chapter 8 3 Texparts grease TG Chapter 8 3 Tool set with bag Chapter 5 99 Tool set with bag Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter 5 98 Tool set with bag Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Tool set with bag Chapter Top apron PR Chapter 5 46 Chapter 9 97 Top apron PR Chapter 5 46 Chapter 9 97 Top apron PR Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top apron PR Chapter 5 4,16,20 Top apron PR Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top apron PR Chapter 5 16, 20 Top apron PR Chapter 5 50, 54 Top apron PR Chapter 5 16, 20 Top apron PR Chapter 5 50, 54 Top apron PR Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 40,42 Top apron PR Chapter 5 26,28,30,34,40 Top apron PR Chapter 5 26, 34, 40 Top apron PR Chapter 5 50, 54 Top apron PR Chapter 5 50, 54 Top apron PR Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top apron cradle 100 OH Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 100 OH Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 36,68 Chapter 9 77 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 36,68 Chapter 9 77 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 26,28,30,34,72 Chapter 9 66, 77 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 40, 78 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 26 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 76 Chapter 9 34, 66, 77 Top apron cradle 110 OH Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 130 OH Chapter 5 40, 42, 70 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 130 OH Chapter 5 40, 74 Chapter 9 88 Top apron cradle 68.4 OH Chapter 5 8,16,20,66 Chapter 9 37, 51 Top apron cradle 68.4 OH Chapter 5 4, 8, 64 Chapter 9 25 Top apron cradle 68.4 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 Top apron cradle 68.4 OH Chapter 5 4,8,16,20,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 Top apron cradle 68.4 OH Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,60 Chapter 9 25,37,51,66 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 66 Chapter 9 37, 51 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 4, 64 Chapter 9 25 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,60 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 50, 54, 80 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 Top apron cradle 75 OH Chapter 5 46, 84 Chapter 1228 Chapter 1229
231 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,56 Chapter 9 25, 37, 51 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 66 Chapter 9 37, 51 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 4, 64 Chapter 9 25 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 62 Chapter 9 37, 51 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 50, 54, 80 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 70 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 78 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 Top apron cradle 82.5 OH Chapter 5 46, 84 Top apron cradle 90 OH Chapter 5 50, 54, 82 Top apron cradle 90 OH Chapter 5 16, 20, 58 Chapter 9 37, 51 Top roller 100 LP Chapter 3 2 Top roller 100 LP Chapter 3 5 Top roller 100 LP Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 Top roller 100 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88, 109, 120 Top roller 110 LP Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 26,28,30,34 Top roller 110 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88 Top roller 130 LP Chapter 3 6 Top roller 130 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 9 88 Top roller 68.4 LP Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top roller 68.4 LP Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top roller 70 LP Chapter 3 9 Top roller 70 LP Chapter 3 8 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4, 8, 12, 16 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 4, 16, 20 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 46, 50, 54 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 9 97 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 9 109, 120 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 9 Top roller 75 LP Chapter 3 8 Top roller 80 LP Chapter 3 9 Top roller 80 LP Chapter 3 8 Top roller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 4, 16, 20 Top roller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 4 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top roller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 46, 50, 54 Top roller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 6 Chapter 5 46 Top roller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Chapter 9 109, 120 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 3 Chapter 5 16, 20 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 4 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 5 Chapter 5 50, 54 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 6 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 7 Chapter 5 50, 54 Chapter 9 109, 120 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 9 Top roller 90 LP Chapter 3 8 Top rollers LP Chapter 8 4 Top rolller 82.5 LP Chapter 3 2 Chapter 5 4,8,12,16,20 Torque wrench Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 Torque wrench Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 Tube cutter Chapter 5 98, 103, 104 W Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 38, 42 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 38,40 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 Chapter 1230 Chapter 1231
232 Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Designation Ref. No. Chapter Page Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 38,40 Chapter 9 81, 84, 86 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 32,36 Chapter 9 70, 73 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 32, 34 Chapter 9 70, 73, 75 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 32, 34 Chapter 9 70, 73, 75 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 52, 54 Chapter 9 114, 117 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 48, 50 Chapter 9 103, 106 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 14,16 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 14, 16 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 18, 20 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 18, 20 Chapter 9 43, 46, 48 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 6,9 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 6, 9 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 10, 12, 13 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 10, 12, 13 Chapter 9 29, 32, 34 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 2,4 Chapter 9 19, 21, 22 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 2, 4 Chapter 9 19, 21, 22 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 22, 26, 27 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 24, 28, 30 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 25, 30 Chapter 9 57,59,60,64 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 22, 26, 27 Chapter 9 57,58,60,65 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 24, 28 Chapter 9 57, 58,60,65 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 25, 30 Chapter 9 57, 59,60,64 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 44,46 Chapter 9 92, 94 Weighting arm PK Chapter 5 52 Chapter 9 114, 117 Wharve CWL Chapter 7 5 Chapter 1232 Chapter 1233
233 Notes
234 Notes
235 Notes
236 Notes
237 Notes
Number Wheeler P/N Description Set Rex P/N Notes
1 604041 Base 1 4041 2 604042 Base Cover 1 4042 3 608849 Washer (M5) 2 4 600124 Spring Washer (M5) 2 5 600329 Rd Hd Machine Screw (M5x8) 2 6 604047 Strainer 1 4047 7 600204 Rd Hd Machine Screw (M6x10)
Number Wheeler P/N Description Set Rex P/N Notes 1 603500 Base 1 J001 2 603501 Support, Right 1 J002 3 603502 Support, Left 1 J003 4 600328 Nut (M8)
1 603500 Base 1 J001 2 603501 Support, Right 1 J002 3 603502 Support, Left 1 J003 4 600328 Nut (M8) 4 5 600130 Spring Washer (8mm) 4 6 600344 Roll Pin (M6x30) 4 7 600129 Socket Hd Cap Screw (M8x25) 4 8
Number Wheeler P/N Description Set Rex P/N Notes
1 607051 Base 1 A050 2 607052 Motor Cover 1 A052 3 600778 Socket Hd Cap Screw (M8x60) 2 4 607053 Scrap Receiver 1 A053 5 607054 Tank Upper Cover 1 A054 6 607055 Oil Pot 1 A055 7 607056 Strainer 1 A056
Machine devices, jig devices
Machine devices, jig devices 853 K0697 Rolled thread studs DIN 6379 Material: Tempered steel. KIPP Rolled thread studs DIN 6379 Order No. D L B1 B2 Approx. weight g Surface finish: Thread rolled. Class
KIRÁLY TRADING KFT H-1151 Budapest Mogyoród útja 12-14 tel: 061307-3801 [email protected]. Clamps Clamping devices
04000 Clamps Clamping devices 23000 22000 21000 20000 09000 08000 07000 06000 05000 04000 03000 02000 01000 297 04010 Adjustable straps Tempered steel 1.1191 Black oxide finish nlm 04010-101 Suitable thrust
1/29/2008 DR70. Baja Motorsports Inc. P.O. Box 61150 Phoenix, AZ 85082 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 43
DR70 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 43 CYLINDER & CYLINDER HEAD 1 DR70-001 883099044472 CYLINDER 1 1 2 DR70-002 883099044489 GASKET, CYLINDER 1 1 3 DR70-003 883099044496
M113 VEHICLE FAMILY RUBBER TRACK INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SOUCY TRACK SYSTEM 04-M113-1ENS (SPLIT IDLER) Litho d in Canada 1 04-M113-1ENS
M113 VEHICLE FAMILY RUBBER TRACK INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (SPLIT IDLER) 1 # TABLE OF CONTENTS List of parts and tools................................................3 Installation of complete kit...................................................5
OWNER S/OPERATOR S - PARTS MANUAL CEMENT MIXER MODEL MX-80
OWNER S/OPERATOR S - PARTS MANUAL CEMENT MIXER MODEL MX-80 Read the Operator s Manual entirely. When you see this symbol, be aware that the subsequent instructions and warnings are serious - follow without
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
TECHNICAL INFORMATION Models No. 2012NB Description 304mm (12") Automatic Thickness Planer CONCEPTION AND MAIN APPLICATIONS * Compact and light weight (27 Kg./59 lbs) automatic thickness planer for easier
TRIMMING UNIT/DIAMOND MACHINE TST.13
TRIMMING UNIT/DIAMOND MACHINE TST.13 REFERENCE BOOK rel. 02.15 TRIMMING UNIT/DIAMOND MACHINE TST.13 REL. 02.15 ENGLISH LANGUAGE 1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION TST.13 was designed and built for processing methacrylate.
HOBBING MACHINE TYPE ZFWZ 8000x40
Inventory number 416/635 Year of production 1973 Serial number 7160 HOBBING MACHINE TYPE ZFWZ 8000x40 Application The machine is provided for milling cylindrical, helical and helix cogwheels. The tooth
Self-aligning ball bearings
Self-aligning ball bearings Designs... 470 Basic design... 470 Sealed bearings... 470 Bearings with an extended inner ring... 472 Bearings on sleeves... 473 Self-aligning ball bearing kits... 474 Appropriate
1/29/2008 DR50. Baja Motorsports Inc. P.O. Box 61150 Phoenix, AZ 85082 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 45
DR50 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 45 CYLINDER & CYLINDER HEAD Part UPC Number Description Baja Description 1 DR50-001 842645074424 CYLINDER 1 1 2 DR50-002 842645074431
3000, 4000, 4100, 7500, 7700
3000, 4000, 4100, 7500, 7700 Drum & Disc Brake Lathes s Identification READ these instructions before placing unit in service. KEEP these and other materials delivered with the unit in a binder near the
SECTION G2: CABLE PROCESSOR MODULE MAINTENANCE
SECTION G2: CABLE PROCESSOR MODULE MAINTENANCE Cable Processor Module overview WARNING! When tipping the Cable Processor Module back, (after removing the toggle arm pin), use extreme caution not to drop
DR90. Baja Motorsports Inc. P.O. Box 61150 Phoenix, AZ 85082 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 51
DR90 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 51 CYLINDER & CYLINDER HEAD Part UPC Number Description Baja Description 1 DR90-001 842645048166 CYLINDER 1 1 2 DR90-002
Technical Data. 7. Bearing Fits. 7.1 Interference. 7.2 Calculation of interference F B LLLLLLLLL( A-54
Technical Data 7. Bearing Fits 7.1 Interference For rolling s the rings are fixed on the or in the housing so that slip or movement does not occur between the mated surface during operation or under. This
Rollers. from the UK s largest roller manufacturer. Quality Performance Reliability
Rollers from the UK s largest roller manufacturer Quality Performance Reliability 42 Index Gravity Rollers Light to Medium Duty 4 Heavy Duty 5 Plastic Rollers 6 Stainless Steel Rollers 7 Grooved Rollers
World Bridge Replacement Parts for EMD 567 and 645 Diesel Engines
40000927-WB REPAIR KIT, WATER PUMP 40005124-WB MAIN & ROD BEARING KIT, 16 CYLINDER 40005125-WB MAIN & ROD BEARING KIT, 20 CYLINDER 40006129-WB PISTON, 645E HTG AND TIN PLATED 40006130-WB PISTON, 645 E3
Driven Toolholders for SAUTER Turrets
Driven Toolholders for SAUTER Turrets Manufacturer of Precision Tools since 1974 INNOVATION PRECISION INDIVIDUALITY QUALITY SERVICE Table of Contents Type Page Driven Toolholders DIN 5482 - Disc-type Turrets
Johnson Power Ltd. / MAINA GEAR COUPLINGS
PGE 1 Johnson Power Ltd. / MIN GER OUPLINGS Johnson Power, Ltd. is now pleased to offer Maina gear couplings. Maina designs and manufactures a complete line of gear couplings and spindles for industrial
Preface nivtec.com 3
nivtec.com Preface nivtec.com 3 nivtec 4 nivtec.com Planning with an Eye for Details nivtec.com 5 prolight+sound 2012 6 nivtec.com Meeting Point Fair Booth nivtec.com 7 Our Preparations 8 nivtec.com Enable
STAR Linear Bushings and Shafts Supplement RE 83 117/2001-08. Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies
STAR Linear Bushings and Shafts Supplement RE 83 117/2001-08 Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies STAR Linear Motion Technology Ball Rail Systems Standard Ball Rail Systems Ball Rail Systems with Aluminum
DR90. Baja Motorsports Inc. P.O. Box 61150 Phoenix, AZ 85082 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 51
DR90 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PART NUMBERS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 51 CYLINDER & CYLINDER HEAD 1 DR90-001 842645048166 CYLINDER 1 1 2 DR90-002 842645048173 GASKET, CYLINDER 1 1 3 DR90-003
UFO 1 FOLDER INDEX A2 FOLDING MACHINE TYPE 10060 LIST NO DESCRIPTION PAGE 10101M Main Assembly - Mechanical 2 10201M Main Roller Assembly 4 16101M Upper & Lower Perforator Shaft Assembly 6 12701M Primary
6,100 7,000 lb. Spring Axles
Typical Industries & Applications include: Recreational Vehicle Trailers Enclosed Trailers Cargo Vehicle Race Vehicle Open Utility Trailers Landscape Equipment Dump Trailers Construction Agricultural Equipment
1/29/2008 DR125 / DR150. Baja Motorsports Inc. P.O. Box 61150 Phoenix, AZ 85082 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PARTS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 55
DR125 / DR150 Toll Free: 888-863-2252 PARTS AND PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE 1 of 55 CYLINDER HEAD ASSY. 1 125-001 883099006937 CYLINDER HEAD COVER 1 1 2 125-002 883099006944 BOLT M6X28 2 3 3 125-003 883099006951
MONDOATHENS BASKETBALL SET (Reference PK110)
MONDOATHENS BASKETBALL SET (Reference PK110) DESCRIPTION The MONDOATHENS backstop unit is mainly designed for multi-sports pavilions and installations where the highest-level basketball competitions are
For New Technology Network. Steel Manufacturing Machinery Product Guide Book
For New Technology Network R Steel Manufacturing Machinery Product Guide Book Ecological / Economical proposals from NTN NTN products exhibit benefits at various locations. Steel manufacturing equipment
PRINCE 50 Parti di ricambio agg. al 30-11-09
. 缸 头 罩 部 件 CYLINDER HEAD COVER(FOR EUROPE) 50000 COVER COMP HEAD 2 5000 GASKET HEAD COVER 3 50002 Aeration Head Cover 4 50372 AERATION CAP 5 50355 TUBE BREATHER 6 50356 TIE-IN 7 50358 AERATION TUBE ASSY
DR50 Hensim Dirt Runner 49cc Dirt Bike (VIN PREFIX LLCH or LUAH)
Page 1 of 21 Product Information Baja Web > Product Information > Parts Lists > DIRTBIKE > DR50 Hensim Dirt Runner 49cc Dirt Bike (VIN PREFIX LLCH or LUAH) DR50 Hensim Dirt Runner 49cc Dirt Bike (VIN PREFIX
SERVICE PARTS LIST PAGE 1 OF 6 BASE ASSEMBLY SPECIFY CATALOG NO. AND SERIAL NO. WHEN ORDERING PARTS 12" DUAL BEVEL COMPOUND MITER SAW B27A
PAGE 1 OF 6 BASE ASSEMBLY 00 0 EXAMPLE: Component Parts (Small #) Are Included When Ordering The Assembly (Large #). SPECIFY CATALOG NO. AND NO. WHEN ORDERING PARTS 1 02-80-0050 Thrust Bearing (1) 2 05-80-0510
Depending on which elastic support you have you can secure the V2 power unit to the following seat bracket tubes: EXTERNAL DIAMETER 27.
ASSEMBLY 1 - EPS V2 POWER UNIT (SOLUTION 5) 1.1 - POSITIONING INSIDE THE SEAT TUBE WITH ELASTIC SUPPORT IN THE SEAT BRACKET TUBE Depending on which elastic support you have you can secure the V2 power
TL-Series Sub-Spindle Operator s Addendum
3 4 5 11 9 TL-Series Sub-Spindle Operator s Addendum 2 1 12 10 6 7 8 20HP VECTOR DUAL DRIVE LIVE TOOLING SUB SPINDLE 2008 Haas Automation, Inc. 96-0037 rev L 9/08 1 1. Introduction Specific M codes are
PARTS BOOK. hohner 48/5S. Stitcher Head. Vol.2 UB706016-01. 110407/hohner48/5S/01/KS
PARTS BOOK hohner /5S Stitcher Head 007/hohner/5S/0/KS Vol. UB70606-0 Hohner /5 Revision Control List Page / Correction (a: Parts No. c: Description d: S/N e: Remarks f: Other g: Registration h: Illustration
K-39/K-39B. Drain Cleaning Machine. Ridge Tool Company/Elyria, Ohio, U.S.A.
K-/K-B A- AUTOFEED Cable Chuck Pan Head Screw # - () Chuck Adapter Nose Piece Spiral Ring () Hand Grip Sleeve Clamp Springs () Spacer Clips () Gasket Drum Front Drum Liner Screw # - x () Drum Back Power
SE-1200-EI. Operation & Parts Manual
SE-1200-EI Operation & Parts Manual SE 1200 EI OWNERS MANUAL Table of Contents 1. Installation guide 2. Set-up instructions 3. Operation instructions 4. Cleaning 5. Troubleshooting 6. Parts manual 7. Electrical
HYDRAULIC LIFT TABLE CART 2200-LB.
HYDRAULIC LIFT TABLE CART 2200-LB. OWNER S MANUAL WARNING: Read carefully and understand all MACHINE ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS before operating. Failure to follow the safety rules and other
LU6X-130 Instructions and Parts List (including LU6X Basic) Operating Instructions
LORTONE LU6X-130 Item # 061-092 LU6X Basic Item # 061-090 LU6X-130 Instructions and Parts List (including LU6X Basic) Operating Instructions Introduction The LU6X is one the most versatile pieces of equipment
Precision made in Europe. As per DIN 8606. The heart of a system, versatile and expandable.
1 von 9 Precision made in Europe. As per DIN 8606. The heart of a system, versatile and expandable. Main switch with auto-start protection and emergency off. Precision lathe chuck as per DIN 6386 (Ø 100mm).
CHAPTER 7 PARTS LISTS, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND WARRANTY
CHAPTER 7 PARTS LISTS, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND WARRANTY Parts List - Handlebar Assembly NOTE: Part numbers listed are available through MacKissic, Inc. Please add 916- prefix to the part number when ordering.
DUGARD. Machine Tools Since 1939. Dugard 700L Series Heavy Duty CNC Lathes. www.dugard.com
DUGARD Machine Tools Since 1939 Dugard 700L Series Heavy Duty CNC Lathes www.dugard.com Dugard 700L Heavy Duty CNC Lathe 2000, 3000 or 4000mm bed length Designed for easy and convenient operation The concave
ELECTRIC PERISTALTIC MORTAR POINTING PUMP
ELECTRIC PERISTALTIC MORTAR POINTING PUMP pointing gun & control valve ACF405 PERISTALTIC PuMP hopper feed roller & tube pump for refurbishment & repair trades heritage & conservation bridge & underground
Part No. AJS & MATCHLESS WHEELS & BRAKES - NEW PARTS Price (20% VAT)
Part No. AJS & MATCHLESS WHEELS & BRAKES - NEW PARTS Price (20% VAT) Price (excl VAT) Michelin Inner Tube, 3.00/3.25 x 17" 11.00 9.17 Michelin Inner Tube, 3.25/3.50/4.10 x 18" 13.00 10.83 Michelin Inner
Ring-spinning processing
Technical Bulletin 341104 Introduction The sections that follow relate to the processing of 1.5dtex 38 mm Ingeo PLA fiber intended for conversion through the cotton or short staple spinning route. The
TBi Industries. MIG / MAG Welding torches TBi Expert 0. 1
TBi Industries MIG / MAG Welding torches TBi Expert 1 0. 1 CONTENTS. TBi Expert Gas cooled torches TBi 150 Classic Series 60% (10 min.) Mix : 150 A CO 2 : 180 A Ø 0.6-1.0 mm Water cooled torches TBi 240
Dismantling and Reassembly Guide
Super X3 Mill Dismantling and Reassembly Guide A picture story book to help you dismantle and reassemble your Sieg Super X3 Mill Arc Euro Trade Ltd. 10 Archdale Street, Syston, Leicester, LE7 1NA. Web:
INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND PARTS LIST MODEL 14-10
VERTICAL BAND SAWS INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND PARTS LIST MODEL 1-10 DAKE/PARMA WHEN ORDERING PARTS GIVE COMPLETE SERIAL NUMBER OF MACHINE GIVE PART NUMBER AND NAME GIVE AMOUNT REQUIRED Unless the above data
FAG tools for mechanical mounting and dismounting of rolling bearings. Technical Product Information
FAG tools for mechanical mounting and dismounting of rolling bearings Technical Product Information Contents Mechanical mounting and dismounting of rolling bearings 2 Tools for mounting 4 Mounting tool
United Kingdom Sweden Germany Switzerland USA, Canada and Mexico China Japan France Linear Units Y07 GB Asia Pacific Italy EU-200502-03 03JUL
Linear Units Linear Units Table of Contents Introduction... 5 Introduction... 5 How to Choose a Unit...6-7 Technical Introduction...8 - Linear Units with Ball Screw Drive and Ball Guide... 3 Introduction...
INSTRUCTION. Industrial Sewing Machines. No. 010012. First published : June 1997 Second edition : March 2001
INSTRUCTION Industrial Sewing Machines First published : June 1997 Second edition : March 2001 No. 010012 INTRODUCTION Thank you for your purchasing Kansai Special's DLR Series. Read and study this instruction
FOREWORD. Right and left as used throughout this manual are determined by facing the direction the machine will travel when in use.
FOREWORD The purpose of this manual is to assist you in operating and maintaining your Flail mower. Read it carefully before operating and maintaining the Flail mower, it furnishes the specifications,
MANUAL TRANSMISSION CONTENTS ...
22D-0-1 MANUAL TRANSMISSION CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION... 22D-0-3 1. SPECIFICATIONS... 22D-1-1 TRANSMISSION MODEL TABLE GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS............
[ means: Save time, money and space! MAXXMILL 500. Vertical milling center for 5-side machining
[ E[M]CONOMY] means: Save time, money and space! MAXXMILL 500 Vertical milling center for 5-side machining MAXXMILL 500 MAXXMILL 500 is the ideal vertical milling center for the for the 5-axis operation
1300 MAXTRAK SPECIFICATION
CONE CRUSHER Crusher type: Liners: Standard concave: Lubrication: Adjustment: Control: Concave options: 1300 Automax Crusher. Manganese steel alloy mantle and concave. Medium Coarse. Pumped system having
367 000 Suction assembly for 1.000 l IBC and 205 l drums 1.060 mm suction tube. 367 003 Suction assembly for tanks 1.600 mm suction tube.
PUMPMASTER 2 accessories, other MOBILE oil dispensers PumpMaster 2 Accessories 01 OIL PUMPS 360 1 360 120 367 000 367 011 369 910 360 1 Wall bracket 360 120 Floor bracket 360 001 Bung adaptors 2" (M) connection
TIRE & TUBE SECTION DEFINITIONS: OVERALL WIDTH SECTION HEIGHT (D) OVERALL DIAMETER (A) SECTION WIDTH (B) NOMINAL RIM DIAMETER (C)
TIRE & TUBE SECTION Knowing some basic facts about tire dimensions and sizes along with a few technical aspects of tire construction can help clear up much of the confusion many people have in understanding
Tools Spares Guide. The POP Tools Spares Guide is a users and buyers manual which assists in the identification of required spare parts.
Tools Spares Guide Tools Spares Guide The POP Tools Spares Guide is a users and buyers manual which assists in the identification of required spare parts. Throughout the guide you will find:- Exploded
ISORIA. Centered disc butterfly valves with AMRING elastomer liner. 240 PSI: 1½ to8. 150 PSI : 10 to 24
Type series booklet 8448.1/2-EN--US ISORIA Centered disc butterfly valves with AMRING elastomer liner 240 PSI: 1½ to8 150 PSI : 10 to 24 Design in accordance with ISO 10631 Manual, electrical, pneumatical
For exploded diagram and part number information, refer to the Spare Parts Catalog available on our website at www.rockshox.com.
For exploded diagram and part number information, refer to the Spare Parts Catalog available on our website at www.rockshox.com. Information contained in this publication is subject to change at anytime
The CLIPPER Solutions
The CLIPPER Solutions 111 112 C51 6,5 Hp Ø 350mm 76kg Compact, robust and highly manoeuvrable machines designed for both wet and dry cutting of concrete and asphalt. Machine delivered without diamond blade.
TENSIONMETER ** code 183_LNRSTW **
Electronic tension meter for applications in textile and wire industry. 9 Tension ranges from 0.1-200 cn to 5-50 dan. Versatile instruments usable for applications in textile industry: e. g. 50 up to max.
MACHINE DRAWING QUESTION BANK. 2. What are the parts not usually sectioned? (Nov 04)
MACHINE DRAWING QUESTION BANK UNIT-I 1. Answer the following: Sketch a i. Hexagonal nut convention, ii. Convention of a stud bolt. (Nov 04) 2. What are the parts not usually sectioned? (Nov 04) 3 Answer
T-Series Precision Linear Actuators Installation and Service Manual DW110353GB-1018 - EDITION 5. www.thomsonlinear.com
T-Series Precision Linear Actuators Installation and Service Manual DW110353GB-1018 - EDITION 5 www.thomsonlinear.com Version History Edition Number Edition Date Reason for Revision 1 2004 First edition
Edge 28B. Simple. Clean. PARTS LIST KENT model: 908 4703 010 146 3087 000(1)2007-01
PARTS LIST KENT model: 908 4703 010 Simple. Clean. 2007-01 2 2007-01 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 DESCRIPTION PLAN GENERAL VIEW 2-3 CHASSIS SYSTEM 4-5 SIDE BROOM ASSEMBLY 6-7 HOPPER SYSTEM 8-9 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
1000/14.02 KOBSERT. Thread inserts for metals
1000/14.02 KOBSERT Thread inserts for metals Contents KOBSERT Thread inserts for metals Page The principle 3 The benefits 3 Product types 3 Applications in the Automotive and General industry 4 Technical
Profile rail guides LLR
Profile rail guides LLR Content The SKF brand now stands for more than ever before, and means more to you as a valued customer. While SKF maintains its leadership as the hallmark of quality bearings throughout
HC-3000 SERIES RAKE Parts Breakdown DURABILT INDUSTRIES, LLC - 1810 AIRPORT ROAD POCAHONTAS ARKANSAS 72455
HC-3000 SERIES RAKE Parts Breakdown 1 SPRING TOWER PARTS PAGE 4 RAKE WHEEL AND ARM PARTS PAGE 8 PIVOT PARTS PAGE 6 6 2,3,4 23 21 7 22 24 HUB & SPINDLE PARTS 8 THRU 20 HYDRAULIC PARTS PAGES 10 AND 12 1
Rating when used as a weight carrying hitch without spring bars:
BOLT-TOGETHER WEIGHT DISTRIBUTING HITCH SYSTEM Rating when used as a weight distributing hitch with spring bars: Part Number 48051 4805 48053 48054 Max Tongue Weight 550 Ibs. 750 Ibs. 1000 Ibs. 1400 lbs.
Tool Holder Catalog INDEX ABC VDI 25 LL3602.30051-10.04.2014. 0414/Rö
Tool Holder Catalog INDEX ABC VDI 25 LL3602.30051-10.04.2014 0414/Rö Disclaimer The illustrations in this documents may deviate from the delivered product. We reserve the right to make changes due to errors
FAG Hydraulic nuts. Technical Product Information
FAG Hydraulic nuts Technical Product Information Contents Application 2 Design 2 Design variants 3 Pressure generators, connectors 4 Dimension tables for FAG hydraulic nuts (metric) 6 Dimension tables
Formula World GT 200 DRAFT COPY WWW.TEAMSPEEDMERCHANT.COM. f200.0.0d
DRAFT COPY WWW.TEAMSPEEDMERCHANT.COM f200.0.0d 2 Introduction, Supplies and Additional Equipment Congratulations on your purchase of a Speed Merchant Formula World GT 200 competition chassis. This instruction
Fish Grader User Manual
Fish Grader User Manual 1400 Fish Grader Contents Basic Parts... 2 Set up... 3 Control board needs to be setup... 3 Adjustable legs... 3 Adjustable Inlet cute... 3 Motor... 3 Control-board... 4 Remote
Front axle components, overview
just a test. Front axle components, overview 40-1 General Information Load bearing components and parts of the suspension must not be welded or straightened. Vehicles without drive axle must not be moved,
5 axle Lowbed Semitrailer with Automatic Steering Model ST 70-93 L3. (Lowbed length approx. 14,000 mm) Technical Specification no.
5 axle Lowbed Semitrailer with Automatic Steering Model ST 70-93 L3 (Lowbed length approx. 14,000 mm) Technical Specification no. ST 70-93 L3 06/02 5 axle Lowbed Semitrailer with automatic steering Model
Pallet Jack. OWNER S MANUAL Model MH1230. Important Safety Instructions Assembly Instructions Parts and Hardware Identification
OWNER S MANUAL Model MH1230 Important Safety Instructions Assembly Instructions Parts and Hardware Identification Pallet Jack CAUTION: Read, understand and follow ALL instructions before using this product
3097 en - 2013.06 / e. This manual is to be given to the end user POULIBLOC 2000-3000. Shaft mount reducer. Installation
097 en - 0.06 / e 8 en This manual is to be given to the end user POULIBLOC 000-000 Installation LEOY-SOME ISTALLATIO POULIBLOC 000-000 097 en - 0.06 / e This document complements the general instructions
C O N T E N T S 1 ABOUT THIS PARTS LIST... 2 ENGINE GROUP... 3 3 CONTENTS-FRAME GROUP
C O N T E N T S 1 ABOUT THIS PARTS LIST... 2 2 CONTENTS-ENGINE ENGINE GROUP ENGINE GROUP... 3 3 CONTENTS-FRAME GROUP FRAME GROUP... 5 4 ENGINE PARTS LIST... 9 5 FRAME PARTS LIST...37 1 ABOUT THIS PARTS
Two most common lock nut groups: 1-Prevailing Torque Type Lock Nuts:
Two most common lock nut groups: 1. PREVAILING TORQUE a design feature of the lock nut produces friction between threads of mated components thereby increasing the force needed to tighten as well as loosen
7.3 Fit selection. Inner ring: Rotating. Outer ring: Stationary. Inner ring: Stationary. Outer ring: Rotating. Inner ring: Stationary
7. Bearing Fits 7. Fitting For rolling s, inner and outer rings are fixed on the or in the housing so that relative movement does not occur between fitting surfaces during operation or under. This relative
000594 Eye-bolt for front chain adjustment, Pre-49 singles, 1949-55 twins, 1958-on CS singles 7.60 6.33
Part No. AJS & MATCHLESS GEARBOX & CLUTCH - NEW PARTS Price (20% VAT) Price (excl VAT) Tool for adjusting clutch spring nuts (heavier duty than 017254 spanner) 5.00 4.17 017254 Spanner, single end, dynamo
SE-600-P. Operation & Parts Manual
SE-600-P Operation & Parts Manual SE 600 PC & PS SERIES OWNERS MANUAL Table of Contents 1. Set-up instructions 2. Bridge-Tramming Procedure 3. Operation instructions 4. Cleaning 5. Troubleshooting 6. Parts
ARI-DP30 / DP32 / DP33 / DP34 / DP34T / DP34Tri / DP35 Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP
ARI-DP30 / DP32 / DP33 / DP34 / DP34T / DP34Tri / DP35 Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP Pneumatic actuator ARI-DP ARI-DP30 Pneumatic actuator Page 2 ARI-DP32 ARI-DP33 Pneumatic actuator DP-Actuator Extended stem
Slides and Drawers. The right collection
Slides and Drawers The right collection 1Technical Details Drawer Runners Carrying capacity Kg. Static load Dynamic load Pag. 01 Concealed Runners Excel N Excel N Excel N Excel N650 Excel N Excel PlugIn,
4,000 6,000 lb. Spring Axles
Typical Industries & Applications include: Recreational Vehicle Trailers Enclosed Trailers Cargo Vehicle Race Vehicle (Stacker) Open Utility Trailers Landscape Equipment Sport Utility motorcycle, quad
MANTA Piston Distributor for Oil and Fluid Grease
MANTA Piston Distributor for Oil and Fluid Grease Function Piston distributors meter out and distribute the oil delivered by an intermittently actuated pump. The quantities of oil for the individual lube
HYDRAULIC TABLE CART 500-LB.
HYDRAULIC TABLE CART 500-LB. OWNER S MANUAL WARNING: Read carefully and understand all MACHINE ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS before operating. Failure to follow the safety rules and other basic
Range Road RR Series Semi-Automatic Firewood Processor. Crated Unit Assembly Manual
Range Road RR Series Semi-Automatic Firewood Processor Crated Unit Assembly Manual 1 1) Undo 8-18mm x 19mm Nuts and bolts, 2 on each leg of top frame 2) Lift top of Metal crate off and move out of work
2,500 3,700 lb. Spring Axles
Typical Industries & Applications include: Recreational Vehicle Trailers Enclosed Trailers Cargo Vehicle Race Vehicle Open Utility Trailers Landscape Equipment Sport Utility motorcycle, quad and tri wheel
HAND PALLET TRUCK Lift-Rite
HAND PALLET TRUCK Lift-Rite Before you Order: To ensure that you get the correct parts, be certain whether your L-50 pallet truck is a standard model or one of the loweredheight models (MINI or CHEP).
Roller bearing life. The Reaction of AISI 52100 Bearing Steel to Heat
Roller bearing life in high temperatures A common question maintenance personnel ask bearing companies when their equipment temperature is high or rises is, What is the maximum temperature that your rolling
MÁQUINAS AGRÍCOLAS JACTO S.A. EDITION
AJ English version EDITION - 06/007 CODE - 9790 Parts catalog MÁQUINAS AGRÍCOLAS JACTO S.A. Rua Dr. Luiz Miranda, 650 7580-000 - Pompéia - SP - Brasil Tel.: +55 4 3405-00 - Fax: +55 4 345 306 E-mail: [email protected]
Fluid Level Gauge Fluid Level Sensor Temperature Switch FSA / FSK / TS
Fluid Level Gauge Fluid Level Sensor Temperature Switch FSA / FSK / TS up to size 381; to PN 0.5; to T = 80 C 1. Description 1.1. General FSA fluid level gauges, FSK fluid level sensors and TS temperature
Rexroth Linear Motion Technology
2 Bosch Rexroth Corp. Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies Ball Rail Systems R310A 2202 (2007.05) Rexroth Linear Motion Technology Ball Rail Systems Roller Rail Systems Linear Bushings and Shafts Standard
Product catalogue, tank cleaning systems
Product catalogue, tank cleaning systems Aquamat Tank cleaning units Aquarex Tank cleaning systems www.hammelmann.com Contents (Navigation via Bookmarks) Tank cleaning units L XL XXL High pressure lance
Tube Type Oil Skimmer Comparison
Process Overview- Tube Type Oil Skimmers Oil flows down the face of the skimmer and into a sludge pan that is plumbed to a barrel. Model BG01 & BG34 or 6V Oil Skimmer 1.0 or 3/4 Diameter Collector Tube
POSEIDON 2-29, 2-25 & 2-22 POSEIDON 2-29, 2-25 & 2-22 XT
POSEION 2-29, 2-25 & 2-22 POSEION 2-29, 2-25 & 2-22 XT Repair Manual Index A. Safety precautions 3 B. Technical data 4 C. Structure 5-6. Service / Repair 7-23 E. Tools 24 F. Function 25-26 G. Electric
High Precision Bearings for Combined Loads
High Precision Bearings for Combined Loads Axial/radial bearings Axial angular contact ball bearings Axial/radial bearings with angular measuring system added competence for your success With their forward-looking
BSA Goldstar Parts - Price List April 2016. 65-1137 Exhaust Lifter Cable 15.00. 65-1163 Exhaust Lifter Cable Holder S/S 9.00
Rocker Boxes 65-1137 Exhaust Lifter Cable 15.00 65-1163 Exhaust Lifter Cable Holder S/S 9.00 2-443 Exhaust Lifter Cable Holder Nut S/S 0.50 65-401 Exhaust Lifter Spindle Felt 2.00 65-387 Exhaust Lifter
This instruction is valid for all ACD pump models shown on page 2
Screw pumps ACD Maintenance and Service Instruction This instruction is valid for all ACD pump models shown on page 2 Contents Page List of components 2 Exploded view/ordering code 3 Service intervals
